Manual Cantar Bizerba BC II 100 e 36kg Fara Acumulator 30 Taste Tactile Directe 12538

Retail scale BC II
Basic Class II
Operating instructions
from program version 3.00
6.111.98.5.01.18 en
Alle Rechte vorbehalten

All rights reserved
Tous droits rservs
Reservados todos los derechos
Tutti i diritti riservati
04 / 2013
Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG,
72336 Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64
72301 Balingen/Germany,
Tel. (+49 7433) 12-0, Fax (+49 7433) 12-2696
e-mail:
marketing@bizerba.com
Internet: http://www.bizerba.com
Translation of original operating instructions
6.111.98.5.01.18
Chapter index
About these instructions
About the device
1
2
Installation
3
4
Device and operating controls
5
Operation
6
Programming
7
Troubleshooting
8
Maintenance
9
Technical data
10
Subject index
11
Safety instructions
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II
List of contents
List of contents
1
Page
About these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -
1.1
Safe-keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -
1.2
Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -
1.3
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -
1.4
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.1
Device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.3
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.4
Designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.5
Verification information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.6
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.7
2.7.1
Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
5
6
2.8
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
2.9
Disposal of devices/environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -
3.1
Requirements on the operating personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -
3.2
Device signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -
3.3
Sources of risk related to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -
4.1
Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
Installation and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conditions for the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assemble the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the electric connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of customer's power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of scale network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rechargeable battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation with rechargeable batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery icon display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
6
7
4.2.5
4.2.6
6.111.98.5.01.18
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0-1
List of contents
Page
4.3
4.3.1
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Switch on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -
8
8
4.4
Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -
Device and operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -
5.1
Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -
5.2
5.2.1
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -
2
2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Membrane keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
4
4
7
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening and closing the thermal print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ticket roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert new ticket roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
- 10
- 11
- 11
- 12
5.4.4
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -
6.1
Switching on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -
6.2
Switch off device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -
6.3
Zerosetting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price labeling with manual triggering * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price labeling with automatic start * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piece price multi- label printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed weight label multi-printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
6.5
6.5.1
Unit price input via 10-key keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10

Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . 6 - 10
6.6
Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
6.7
Scroll function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
6.8
Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
6.9
Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
6.10
Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
0-2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.111.98.5.01.18
List of contents
Page
6.11
6.11.1
6.11.2
Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . .

Calling up PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator sales with PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overwrite PLU unit price. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces
Register manual weight input ( depending on country) . . . . . . . . .
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
15
15
17
17
17
17
18
6.12
6.12.1
Tare functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare balancing for unknown tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unknown tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batch tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare balancing for known tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save tare value weighed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save tare value entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call up operator tare saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
19
19
19
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
23
24
6.12.2
6.12.3
6.13
Assisted sales with ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25
6.14
Talon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26
6.15
Print ticket upon request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26
6.16
Repeat ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27
6.17
6.17.1
6.17.2
6.17.3
Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Open the last ticket via the operator key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open the ticket via ticket number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overwrite VAT from PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.18
Serviced selling with label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30
6.19
By Count article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 31
6.20
Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 36
6.21
By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40
6.22
Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
6.23
6.23.1
6.23.2
Product with data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46

Sale with manual input of the traceability number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46
Sale with fixed traceability number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 47
6
6
6
6
27
28
28
29
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -
7.1
Initial display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -
7.2
Menu password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -
7.3
Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -
6.111.98.5.01.18
0-3
List of contents
Page
General programming sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -
7.4
Initial scale setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.5.8
7.5.9
Overview of list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU direct keys
..................................
Barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLD labels
........................................
Logos
...............................................
VAT rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
8
9
7.6
General procedure for text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
7.7
Overview of scrolling messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
7.8
Barcode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manufacturer code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manufacturer code EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instore code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instore code EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9
Traceability marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
7.10
Overview of By Count article definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33

Create By Count piece goods in a PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
7.11
Create overview of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35
7.12
Overview of By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
7.13
7.13.1
Overview VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 37
Assign VAT to PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
7.14
Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) . . . 7 - 39
0-4
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
16
18
19
20
25
26
6.111.98.5.01.18
List of contents
Page
7.15
7.15.1
7.15.2
7.15.3
7.15.4
7.16
7.16.1
7.16.2
7.16.3
7.16.4
7.16.5
7.16.6
7.16.7
Article maintenance menu Pr 1-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defining PLU (article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110 .
Unit price input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sell-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overwriting the price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Article type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU article text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplementary text 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplementary text 1-10 for BLD text fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logo print in BLD logo fields
.............................
By Count: Pieces per package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight . . . . . .
By-Count: Mandatory input of pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By-Count: Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By-Count: Fixed weight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mandatory input of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overwriteable VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare % (dependent on country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print PLU (article) lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr115 .
Deleting PLU (article) individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 120 .
Deleting PLU (article) from - to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 121 .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
42
43
44
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
50
50
51
51
51
52
53
54
54
Data management Menu Pr 2-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200 .
Creating header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201 .
Defining scrolling message text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 202 .
Printing texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 205 .
Deleting supplementary texts and header/footer texts . Pr 206 .
Deleting supplementary text individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting scrolling message texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 210 .
Defining barcode format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a code constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting numeric codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and adopting code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administering barcode structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211 .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
55
55
56
57
58
59
59
59
59
60
61
61
62
62
64
65
6.111.98.5.01.18
0-5
List of contents
Page
7.16.8
7.16.9
7.16.10
7.16.11
7.16.12
7.17
7.17.1
7.17.2
7.17.3
7.17.4
0-6
Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 .

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece) . . .
Barcode for non-PLU minus article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode for total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product groups for non-PLU weighed products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed products
(sold by piece) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product groups for non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods) . . . . . . . .
VAT for Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU number for non-PLU articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing BLD label list / logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 220 .
Printing BLD label list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting BLD labels / logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 225 .
Deleting BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting BLD logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 230 .
Defining VAT rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT inclusive or exclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231 .
Printing VAT list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting VAT numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Same VAT for all articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
67
67
68
68
68
68
69
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
69
69
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
72
72
72
73
73
73
74
74
74
74
Reports menu Pr 3-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300 .
Printing reports on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 310 .
Scales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU report with one article text line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU report with all article text lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product group report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that
contains data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that
contain data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAT sales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing report on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 311 .
Displaying / deleting sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 320 .
Displaying sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
75
75
77
77
78
78
79
80
7 - 81
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
81
82
82
83
83
83
83
6.111.98.5.01.18
List of contents
Page
7.18
7.18.1
7.18.2
7.18.3
7.18.4
7.18.5
7.18.6
7.18.7
7.18.8
7.18.9
Configuration menu Pr 5-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr500 .
Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing year either 2 or 4-digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting main operating mode
Pr510 .
Selecting main operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511 .
Selecting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for different operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr515 .
Automatic zero setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open tickets / labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Origin labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining data of origin number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sales calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mandatory input for By Count pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mandatory input for fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling message settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 516 .
Selecting scrolling message no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting display location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520 .
Constant key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing article and total label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Items operator display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cash register functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amount tend./change operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Talon printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeating ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing cancellation and canceled articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing included VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ticket printout, as required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for quick service mode
Pr 521 .
Settings for price labeling mode * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr525 .
Labeling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple label printing for price per piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating operator no. to operator keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 530 .
6.111.98.5.01.18
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
- 84
- 84
- 85
- 85
- 85
- 86
- 87
- 87
- 87
- 88
- 88
- 89
- 89
- 89
- 90
- 90
- 90
- 90
- 91
- 91
- 91
- 91
- 92
- 92
- 92
- 93
- 93
- 93
- 93
- 94
- 94
- 94
- 95
- 96
- 96
- 97
- 97
- 98
- 98
- 99
- 99
- 99
- 100
- 101
- 101
- 102
- 103
0-7
List of contents
Page
7.18.10
7.18.11
7.18.12
7.18.13
7.19
7.19.1
0-8
PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535 .

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad . . . . . .
PLU direct key mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU direct key allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay time PLU no. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing PLU direct keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr536 .
Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540 .
Rounding and price calculation settings for
national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 545 .
Rounding methods for customer total * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rounding of article total
* ..............................
Rounding for By count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
103
103
104
104
104
105
106
107
108
7
7
7
7
108
109
109
110
Ticket design overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 550 .
Printing barcode on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode height in mm on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing tare on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing footer text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing foreign currency supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing rounding supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Font change on tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket . . . . . . .
Ticket counter printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing amount paid in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing header logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing footer logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
111
112
112
112
113
113
113
114
114
115
115
115
116
116
116
117
117
6.111.98.5.01.18
List of contents
Page
7.20
7.20.1
7.20.2
7.20.3
7.20.4
Label design - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designing labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555 .
Label type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing label distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packed-on and sell-by date on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode height in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tara printout on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative text with sell-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logo printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beginning of text field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start of data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data field monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Font change on tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing price frame and texts on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label . . . . .
Printing foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180 rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) . . . . . .
Alternative text for packed-on date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative text for use-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing units on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing speed for label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 556 .
Saving configuration from Pr 555 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign currency settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 560 .
Selecting foreign currency function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting foreign/ second currency display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign currency calculation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign currency symbol on label for price field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decimal places in foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign currency factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rounding of foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign currency translation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ticket call-up data volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 570 .
6.111.98.5.01.18
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
118
119
120
121
122
122
122
122
123
123
123
124
124
124
125
125
126
127
127
127
128
128
130
130
130
130
131
131
132
132
133
133
133
134
134
134
134
135
135
135
136
136
0-9
List of contents
Page
7.21
7.21.1
7.21.2
7.21.3
7.21.4
7.21.5
7.21.6
7.21.7
7.21.8
7.21.9
7.21.10
7.21.11
7.21.12
7.21.13
7.21.14
0 - 10
Commissioning menu Pr 6-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 600 .
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of scale current IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP: IP address if no DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . .
DNS1: Address of domain name server 1,
if no DHCP selected
....................................
DNS2: Address of domain name server 2,
if no DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leasing address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display current IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr601 .
Printout of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602 .
Setting scale number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 603 .
Setting department number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 604 .
Setting machine ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 605 .
Commissioning (memory management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 606 .
No. of PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of supplementary texts per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of BLD text fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of items (ticket memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
By count, fixed weight, VAT and tare % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decimal places* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using expanded RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Journal function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting database configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . Pr 607 .
Scale type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multicast IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multicast port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UDP port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling display lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 610 .
Setting turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 615 .
WLAN settings
Pr 621 .
Activating WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ping on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address of WLAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test telegram on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP address of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port number of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beeper on/off
Pr 622 .
Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 625 .
Changing key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 630 .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
137
137
138
138
138
138
138
7 - 139
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
139
139
139
140
140
140
141
142
142
144
144
144
144
144
145
145
145
146
146
147
148
148
149
149
149
150
151
151
152
152
153
153
154
154
154
154
155
156
6.111.98.5.01.18
List of contents
Page
7.21.15
7.21.16
7.21.17
7.21.18
Keyboard selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr631 .

RAM clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 666 .
Entering password for menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 690 .
Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting . . . . . . . Pr 695 .
Changing main currency to second currency (Euro) . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting PLU price into EURO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
7
7
7
7
158
159
159
160
160
160
7.22
7.22.1
7.22.2
7.22.3
7.22.4
7.22.5
7.22.6
7.22.10
7.22.11
7.22.12
Service menu Pr 7-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700 .
Printing boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701 .
Printing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr702 .
Printing menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703 .
Printing weighing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 704 .
Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710 .
Feed for labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving print format on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correcting ticket feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing print intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712 .
Displaying load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715 .
Displaying program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 716 .
Main program version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bootloader version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Font resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 717 .
Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718 .
Logbook control
Pr 730 .
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
161
161
162
163
163
164
165
165
165
166
166
166
167
167
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
169
170
171
7.23
Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 174
7.22.7
7.22.8
7.22.9
6.111.98.5.01.18
0 - 11
List of contents
Page
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -
8.1
Fault description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -
8.2
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 -
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
.................................................
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
products for printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
9
9
9
1
1
2
4
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the weight display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note on storing thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ticket, label and Linerless rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
9
9
9
6
6
6
6
10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -
10.1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -
10.2
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -
10.3
Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Threshold values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -
2
2
Subject index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -
Appendix
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
0 - 12
6.111.98.5.01.18
1
Read through the operating manual carefully before connecting and switching on the
device to ensure that you fully utilize the quality and possibilities of application this device
offers.
This operating manual explains how to operate and set the device.
It also includes functions that are only required by Bizerba Service. Contact your Bizerba
technical consultant if necessary.
Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific
regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the instructions may differ from the supplied
version.
1.1
Safe-keeping
This operating manual is an integral part of the device and must be kept next to it, easily
accessible for all personnel.
If the device is resold, the complete operating manual must be provided with it.
1.2
Target group
The device may only be operated by trained personnel. This means that the operator must
be familiar with the contents of this operating manual.
Installation, servicing and repairs may only be performed by qualified personnel authorized
by Bizerba.
6.111.98.5.01.18
1-1
1
1.3
Symbols used
Various symbols are used in these instructions.
Symbol
Meaning
Text with arrow prompts you to carry out an action.
Key symbols prompt you to press this key on
Mod
Key symbols with a + prompt you to keep the 1st key held down while
you press the second key.
Position numbers in figures.
<Key>
Text within < > describes a key.
Display
Text within indicates the display text.
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________
Observance of these notes is mandatory.
_______________________________________________________________________
Information
_______________________________________________________________________
This information is provided for greater understanding.
_______________________________________________________________________
Menu settings
Prerequisites and menu settings for functions or rules are highlighted in gray.
Menu settings are the prerequisites for descriptions or operation procedures.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 06 -1
Price overwrite permitted
Syntax: Pr 110/ 06 -1
Pr 110
Program number 110
/ 06
Submenu 06
-1
Setting 1
1-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
1.4
1
Warnings
Warnings are divided into danger levels by the signal word.

Signal word
Symbol
Meaning
_______________________________________________________________________
DANGER
Source of danger with high risk with imminent danger for

personnel!
The consequences are:
- critical injuries
- severe damage to health
Measures to avoid the danger are specified.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING
Source of danger with medium risk with potentially threatening

danger for personnel!
The consequences can be:
- serious injuries
- damage to health
- serious damage to property
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION
Source of danger with low risk with potentially threatening

danger for personnel!
The consequences can be:
- Injuries
- Damage to property
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION
Source of danger, improper use!

Damage to property can result.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
1-3
1
1-4
6.111.98.5.01.18
Device
2.1
Device types
About the device
2
The BC II device type is available with either a thermal ticket printer or a label printer.
T = Thermal ticket printer
E = Label printer
BC II 800 T
BC II 800 E
Fig. 1: BC II 800
BC II 100 T
BC II 100 E
Fig. 2: BC II 100
BC II 200 T
BC II 200 E
Fig. 3: BC II 200
2.2
Accessories
We offer a comprehensive accessories program for the device. Please contact your
Bizerba technical consultant for further information.
2.3
Intended use
The BC II scale is particularly suitable for counter sales, quick and self-service, as well as
manual price labeling and simple cash reg. (POS) functions. Use devices only for intended
use.
6.111.98.5.01.18
2-1
About the device
2.4
2
Designation label
Designation label of a verified scale.
Fig. 4: Explanations of the individual labels:
Explanations of the individual labels:

11147xxxxx
Designation label no.
CE 13
CE certification with the last two digits of the year in which the
CE certification was applied.
0103
Identification number of the appointed body Verification Ma

nagement - Stuttgart
D07-09-014
No. of EC type approval
green square symbol (sign for EC-first verification)
BIZERBA
Manufacturer
BCII
Type designation (basic type)
Nr./No.
Device No.
Max 6 kg
Maximum load Max
Min 20 g
Minimum load Min
e=2g
Verification value , e
T= - 6 kg
Subtractive tare maximum load T= -
120-240V 0.35-0.25A
50/60Hz
Electrical data
Scale accuracy class III
Device must not be disposed of in domestic waste. Return to
the manufacturer or dealer Note the statutory regulations in
your country
2-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
2.5
About the device
Verification information
2
Verification information for EC countries

The green M (sign for EC-first verification) is on the designation label of the scale. This
type of scale can be put into operation and used on site provided that it is not connected to
an additional device, e.g. cash register or printer.
Scales that are connected on site to an additional device (e.g. cash register or printer)
must have their first verification carried out either by the responsible verification office or
by a verification officer from Bizerba. Scales as well as the additional device (e.g. cash
register) must be tested and verified. If the scale fulfills the verification specifications with
their additional device, it can be used in legal for trade applications. In the case of
extensions at a later date, once the scale has already been put into operation, the relevant
verification office must be informed.
Scales and additional devices without the CE mark may not be used in legal for trade
operations.
Scales that are verified to a specific verification zone (acceleration of fall) (details are
given on the designation label) may not be used in other verification zones without being
reverified.
According to statutory regulations, the user of a scale must ensure that it is used for its
intended purpose. This includes observation of the verification guidelines, in particular
amendments, supplements and additions.
Reverification information
Reverification of scales is executed according to the respective statutory country
regulations. The verification validity period in Germany for example, for scales is usually 2
years. Price labeling scales have a verification validity period of 1 year. The verification
validity period begins when the scales are put into circulation (installation and
commissioning). Please refer here to the designation label (in the present example, 2007,
as the designation is CE 07).
Verification information for non-EU countries
The statutory regulations of the specific countries must be observed.
_______________________________________________________________________
A yellow mark of conformity is affixed to the load receptor of the
scale, with the inscription Verified by BIZERBA (first verification by
Bizerba). Reverifications must be carried out by the operator of the
scale according to the legal requirements.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
2-3
About the device
2.6
2
Standards and guidelines
The equipment fulfils the following requirements:

Measuring technology
Directive 90/384/EEC
scales guidelines nonautomatic scales
OIML R76-Ed. 2006
Organisation internationale de mtrologie lgale

Nonautomatic weighing instruments
DIN EN 45501
Metrological aspects of nonautomatic scales
OIML R60
Metrological regulation for load cells
WELMEC 2.3
Guideline for software testing
Handbook 44
Specifications, tolerances and other technical require

ments for weighing and measuring devices (USA)
Publication 14
Weighing devices, Checklist, Test procedures

(USA)Weights and Measures Act (Canada)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Directive 2004/108/ EC
EMC-guideline
DIN EN 61000-6-1/ 2007-10
interference resistance
Residential, commercial and light industry
DIN EN 61000-6-3/ 2007-09
emitted interference
Residential, commercial and light industry
DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10
Harmonics current
DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06
Voltage fluctuations and flickers
GB 9254-1998
Information Technology Equipment - Radio Disturbance

Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement
Electrical safety
Directive 2006/ 95 EC
Low voltage guideline
IEC 60950-1/ 2001
Information technology equipment - Safety
DIN EN 60950-1/ 2006-11
UL 60950-1/ 2006-07
DIN EN 60529/ 2000-09
Protection types provided by housing (IP code)
2-4
6.111.98.5.01.18
2.7
About the device
Operating conditions
Do not install or commission equipment until the operating conditions have been fulfilled.
Temperature and air humidity:

The permitted values and class of protection are found on the designation label on the
device and on page 10 - 2.
Installation area
A flat, vibration-free position as well as the driest possible installation must be
guaranteed for our equipment.
Vibrations can affect measurements made by the scales.
Align horizontally
To ensure the precision of the sales, it is of absolute necessity that the device is
aligned horizontally.
Draft
Drafts can affect the measurements made by the scales.
Air convection
Free air convection must be able to form around the device in order to avoid
inadmissible heating.
Supply voltage
The permitted values can be found on the designation label on the device - and
see page 10 - 2.
Trained personnel:
Only trained personnel can maximize the performance of the device and avoid risks.
Written consent for modifications:

Modifications to the devices require our prior written consent. External data dialog
between Bizerba equipment and other manufacturers' equipment, the hardware and
software required, test and modification work, must be clarified with us in writing.
Please contact us or our competent customer service points if you have any doubts
regarding the practical application of these conditions.
For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective
manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.
6.111.98.5.01.18
2-5
2
About the device
2.7.1
2
Power supply
The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be
carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived
from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following
commissions:
-
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)
Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)
Our units are built to VDE protection class I and must be connected to a protective
conductor.
Interference suppression measures
If the mains power supply is subject to electric interference, interference suppression
measures must be taken on site, e.g.:
-
provision of separate mains cable to our equipment.
in problem cases, insertion of capacitively decoupled isolating transformers or other

suppressors into the mains supply lines to our equipment.
2-6
6.111.98.5.01.18
2.8
About the device
Warranty
Installation, commissioning and initial training must be carried out by trained staff from our
sales offices and customer service points or by companies authorized by us.
We do not accept any liability for damages resulting from:
-
Non-compliance with our operating conditions and operating manual.
Defective electrical installation by the customer.
Structural changes to our equipment.
Removal of verification seals and fuse stamps.
Incorrect programming and operation.
Natural wear and tear..
The warranty will lapse if defects/damage occur as a result of interventions by persons we

have not authorized or the use of non-Bizerba genuine spare parts.
If you reset or program devices, check the new setting with a test run and test printout.
This helps to avoid faulty results.
Only trained staff may operate the equipment.
Check that our products are handled correctly and repeat training if necessary.
Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific
regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the operating manual may differ from the
supplied version.
2.9
Disposal of devices/environmental protection
_______________________________________________________________________
Only applies to Germany!
_______________________________________________________________________
This device includes batteries which are subject to the Batteries Act concerning return and
disposal of used batteries and accumulators.
This act holds you as the end user responsible to return the device to the manufacturer or
its distributor for the purpose of recycling and proper disposal after the end of its intended
use.
Bizerba and its distributors are ready to except the returns of your old devices which are
no longer operated.
In these instances, please, contact your Bizerba specialist in charge.
If the device includes a chargeable battery pack, according to the Battery Act you are
responsible to return used battery packs to the distributor or to return locations which are
provided to the public.
Of course, Bizerba and its distributors will also accept your used battery packs.
6.111.98.5.01.18
2-7
2
About the device
2
2-8
6.111.98.5.01.18
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
The safety instructions must be observed throughout the installation, operation,

cleaning and maintenance procedures.
3.1
3
Requirements on the operating personnel
The device may only be operated by people who have been instructed in the operating
procedure. The operating personnel must read and understand the safety instructions in
this Operating Manual.
Please pay special attention to and memorize all safety and hazard information!
Carry out regular training!
Operators (purchasers) as well as supervisory and operating staff must carry out
programming and data protection on our systems and equipment exclusively in
accordance with our operating and programming instructions.
Only use equipment for its intended purpose.
3.2
Device signs
Remove the mains plug from the socket
Fig. 5: Remove the mains plug from the socket
6.111.98.5.01.18
3-1
Safety instructions
3.3
Sources of risk related to the system
_______________________________________________________________________
3
For safety reasons, shut equipment down immediately in the event of

recurring faults, damage of any type, and suspicion of risk of injury.
Always inform the nearest customer service point.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Check before mains connection
Before connecting the device, check
-
the power supply data on the designation label
the power supply data of the mains supply
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING
Incorrect supply voltage !

Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.
-
Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power

supply data do not match the connection values of the scale.
The power supply data must be identical.
Inform Bizerba Customer Service.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION
Voltage at switched-off scale!

Even when the scale is switched off, the scale electronics is live.
Remove the AC power plug to disconnect from the mains.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING
Opening the device!

Electric shock.
-
The device may only be opened by trained and qualified Bizerba

personnel.
_______________________________________________________________________
3-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
Installation
4.1
Transport and storage
Installation
Always transport and store the device in the original packaging
4
4.2
Installation and assembly
Installation, first commissioning, adjustment, initial instruction, Maintenance and repair

may only be performed by our customer service and/or by companies or persons
authorized by us.
4.2.1
Conditions for the place of installation
The place of installation must fulfil the following conditions.

-
Flat installation surface.
Freedom from vibrations, oscillations and drafts, as well as the driest possible
installation must be guaranteed for our equipment.
The equipment must be arranged with respect for operating and work sequence, and
taking account of maintenance aspects.
4.2.2
Assemble the device
Unpacking
Open packaging, remove accessories and lift the device carefully out of the packaging.
6.111.98.5.01.18
4-1
Installation
4.2.3
Leveling
To compensate for any small irregularities in the floor space, the scale can be leveled at
the foot screws using a spirit level.
_______________________________________________________________________
4
After each change of location, the scale must be re-leveled.

_______________________________________________________________________
1
Position the spirit level
Foot screws
1
2
Fig. 6: BC II 800
2
1
Fig. 7: BC II 100
Turn the foot screws 2 until the air
bubble 3 is located in the center of the
spirit level . 1
Fig. 8: Leveling
4-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
4.2.4
Installation
Check the electric connection
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING
Incorrect supply voltage!

Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.
-
Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power

supply data do not match the connection values of the scale.
The power supply data must be identical.
Inform Bizerba Customer Service.
_______________________________________________________________________
Installation of customer's power supply

The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be
carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived
from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following
commissions:
-
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)
Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)
_______________________________________________________________________
Check before mains connection
Before connecting the device, check
-
the power supply data on the designation label
the power supply data of the mains supply
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
4-3
4
Installation
4.2.5
Cable connections
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION
4
Do not insert or remove the connection cable when the device

is switched on.
Interfaces are either defect or misfunctioning.
Always switch off the device before inserting or removing the
connection cable.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Secure the power cable against falling out when strain drops. 4
_______________________________________________________________________
1
EDP (scale network)
Cash drawer
Power cable
Clip (strain relief)
Fig. 9: BC II 100 / 200

1
EDP (scale network)
Cash drawer
Power cable
Clip (strain relief)
2
1
4
3
Fig. 10: BC II 800
4-4
6.111.98.5.01.18
Installation
Example of scale network

Several scales are connected with a switch.
Switch
4
Scale1
Scale 2
Scale 3
Scale 4
Scale 5 1
Scale 6
Connection scale (EDP, scale network)
_______________________________________________________________________
During installation and cabling of systems the Bizerba guideline
Networks for scales need to be adhered to.
Ask your Bizerba consultant or Bizerba Service.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
4-5
Installation
4.2.6
Rechargeable battery
The BC II devices are available with and without rechargeable batteries.

_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING
4
Replace the rechargeable battery!

Risk of explosion if not replaced properly.
-
The installation or removal of the battery may only be carried out

by our customer services and/or a company or person assigned
by us.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Charge battery completely before battery operation.
Procedure:
- Connect mains to scale.
- Switch on scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
Depending on the use and ambient temperature, with a fully charged battery, the scales
can be operated for 20-25 hours without being connected to the mains.
After only 6-7 hours charging time the battery is completely recharged.
Operation with rechargeable batteries

Rechargeable batteries will run down even during prolonged idle periods if the scale is not
connected to the mains. Therefore, connect the scale to the mains at least every
3months.
If the scales are being powered by the mains, the batteries are recharged when switched on
(conservation charging).
_______________________________________________________________________
If the scales are operated at an ambient temperature below 0_C, the
battery cannot be recharged.
_______________________________________________________________________
Overloading the batteries is prevented automatically by an integrated charging circuit. This
charging circuit also prevents any damaging total discharge. The battery lifetime reduces if
it is permanently operated at an almost discharged state.
_______________________________________________________________________
When being operated by battery, the printer prints at a slower speed.
Due to this intentional reduced printing speed, the scales can be
operated for a longer period when not connected to the mains power
supply.
_______________________________________________________________________
4-6
6.111.98.5.01.18
Installation
Battery icon display
4
kg
EURO per
EUR
Fig. 11: Display

1
Battery icon
When connected to the mains:

--Battery icon not visible.
Scales is connected to the mains.
The batteries are charged.
Arrow flashes slowly
Battery is being charged.
Arrow flashes very fast
The temperature of the battery is less than 0C. A statement as to the charged
state of the battery cannot be made.
When battery operated:

Arrow flashes permanently
The charging of the battery is OK.
Arrow flashes fast
Warning, batteries require charging.
Depending on the age of the battery and the ambient temperature, it is possible to
continue operations for about 60 minutes.
Arrow flashes very fast. In addition, a permanent tone occurs for approx. 10 sec.
The battery is empty. The device is switched off after 10 seconds.
6.111.98.5.01.18
4-7
Installation
4.3
Commissioning
Commissioning, as well as instruction on the operation, cleaning, maintenance and

servicing is carried out by the relevant Bizerba customer services office or the Bizerba
trade consultant.
4
4.3.1
Switch on device
Prerequisite
- The device has been installed properly and connected to the mains power supply.
-
The scale should not be loaded.
Switch device on/off, see page 6 - 1.
4.4
Decommissioning
If you wish to decommission the scale for a prolonged period of time,

-
Switch the scale off.
Remove the AC power plug and detach all cable connections.
Clean the scale in accordance with the cleaning instructions.
4-8
6.111.98.5.01.18
5.1
Main switch
5
Fig. 12: BC II
1
Main switch on BC II 800
2
Main switch on BC II 100 and 200
6.111.98.5.01.18
5-1
5.2
Display
1
2
3
4
5
kg
7
EURO per
6
EUR
5
Fig. 13: Dot 7 display

The display is divided into:
1
Dot Matrix (20x208 Dots)
2
Lit icons
Symbols printed on the glass panel (dependent on country)
Light symbol for system identification
Selling price
Unit price
Weight value
5.2.1
Display icons
Type- and country-dependent icons designate different operating states.

The printed icons are marked by arrows that light up.
= Net display after taring process
= Prepack
= Battery operation/battery charging control,
= Unit price per kg
= Unit price per 100g
= Fixed unit price
= Constant unit price
= Operator number after registration
= Character for display of total
I
= Symbol for single division scale
II
= Symbol for dual division scale

= Symbol for fixed weight for dot 7 display
= Symbol for fixed weight for 7 segment display
5-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
5.3
Keyboard
_______________________________________________________________________
Keyboard designs are country-dependent.
_______________________________________________________________________
5
5.3.1
Membrane keyboard
There are two transparent modules on the membrane keyboard into which insert-foils can
be inserted if required.
Insert-foil 30 keys DEU

(Country ID, e.g. DEU defines keyboard
labeling)
Insert-foil 54 keys DEU
Membrane keyboard 54 keys
Membrane keyboard 30 keys
4
3
Fig. 14: Example of insert-foils

Example:
3
Fig. 15: Insert foil with 54 key
Fig. 16: Insert foil with 30 keys.
6.111.98.5.01.18
5-3
5.3.2
1
Keyboard
Keyboard 84 keys
5
Fig. 17: Keyboard
5.3.3
Key functions
Fig. 18: Example of keyboard
5-4
6.111.98.5.01.18
Key
Tab
Function
- 54
<PLU 1> to <PLU 54>

PLU = Price Look Up (product plus price, text, etc. is displayed)
19 - 15
1
Non-numeric and special characters <A< to <Z> (function only in menu)
5
Operator 1 <OP1> to Operator 4 <OP4>

<Paper feed>
<Minus input>
) ]
0
<Reset>
T1
<Fixed tare T1>
T1 - T4
<Fixed tare T1> to <Fixed tare T4>

<Scroll>
St
<Cancellation>
<Cancellation> (country-specific version)
Void
<Cancellation> (country-specific version)
Mod
<Mod>
Esc
<Escape>
<Multiplication>
<Switch> / <Overwrite>
PLU
Man
<Switch> / <Overwrite> (country-specific version)
6.111.98.5.01.18
5-5

Key
Function
<Non-weighed>
<Constant>
5
F
Prepack
<Constant>
(country-specific version)
<Constant> (country-specific version)

<Tare>
Tare
<Tare> (country-specific version)
Ctrl
<Control>
<Enter>
Enter
<Enter> (country-specific version)

<Shift>
<Clear> (delete)
Clr
<Clear> (delete)
<Subtotal>
<Total>
<Print> (country-specific version)
5-6
6.111.98.5.01.18
5.3.4
Keyboard options
Menu setting
- Pr631
- 00 to 03 keyboard selection, see page 7 - 158
Additional frame with 24 keys
5
Additional frame for 24 PLUs.

The additional frame is attached to the basic keyboard.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Fig. 19: Additional 24PLU frame

1
Additional frame
2
Write-on insert
Front-foil with 30 keys

Front-foil with 30 PLU keys.
The front-foil is placed over the top of the basic keyboard.
1
2
Fig. 20: Front foil 30 PLU

1
Front membrane
2
Write-on insert
6.111.98.5.01.18
5-7
5.4
Printer
Models BC II 100 to BC II 800 are equipped with label printer. The printers operate
according to the thermal printing principle. The paper can only be printed on the thermal
side.
5
5.4.1
Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200
Printer lid BC II 100/200

open
The printer lid
arrows 3 .
3
2
is marked on the top with
Hold the printer lid at the positions

marked by the 3 arrows.
Open the printer lid by pulling it
downwards.
2
Fig. 21: Printer lid BC II 100/200

close
Fold the printer lid upwards.
Side cover BC II 100/ 200

Open
Hold the side cover
at the fluted grip.
Open the side cover pulling it

downwards.
close
Close the side cover by pulling it

upwards.
1
Fig. 22: Side cover BC II 100/ 200
5-8
6.111.98.5.01.18
Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800
Side cover BC II 800

Open
Hold the slide cover at the
grips.
5
Open the side cover pulling it

downwards.
close
Close the side cover by pulling it
upwards.
Fig. 23: Side cover BC II 800

Printer lid
The printer lid is
arrows 3 .
marked at the bottom with
Open
2
Take hold of the printer lid 2 at the

places marked with the arrows. 3
Open the printer lid by pulling it upwards.
3
Fig. 24: BC II 800 Open printer lid

close
Fold the printer lid down 2 .
Fig. 25: BC II 800 Close printer lid
6.111.98.5.01.18
5-9
5.4.2
Opening and closing the thermal print head
BC II 100/200
2
open
5
Place one finger underneath the red grip

element 1 .
Pull the grip element 1 towards you until
the thermal print head disengages and
folds down. 2
1
close
Fig. 26: Label printer in BC II 100
Place your finger on the red grip element
1 .
Press the thermal print head 2 upwards
against the printer roller and then
backwards until the thermal print head
engages.
BC 800
open
Place your index finger underneath the
red grip element. 1 .
Push the grip element 1 upwards until

the thermal print head disengages. 2
Fold the thermal print head upwards.
Fig. 27: Opening the thermal print head

close
Place your thumb on the red grip
element.
Push the thermal print head backwards
against the printer roller and then
downwards until the thermal print head
engages.
Fig. 28: Closing the thermal print head
5 - 10
6.111.98.5.01.18
5.4.3
Ticket roll
Run out of ticket paper

The paper end is indicated by a red mark on the paper. When this mark appears, insert a
new ticket roll.
Paper feed for label printer with ticket paper
5
1
take-up arbor
ticket roll
deflection roller with red adjustable ring
thermal print head
printer roller
Insert new ticket roll

Open the side cover and printer cover,
see page 5 - 9.
5
4
Open the thermal print head, see page

5 - 10.
Remove the empty core of the ticket roll.
Insert a new ticket roll
Abb. 29: Paper feed for ticket paper /

BC II 800
Feed the ticket paper around the

take-up arbor 1 and the deflection bolt
3 as shown in the figure. Insert paper
until the paper edge protrudes the
thermal print head 4 by approx. 80mm.
1
2
Abb. 30: Paper feed ticket paper /

BC II 800
Close the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10.
Open the side cover and printer cover, see page 5 - 9.
6.111.98.5.01.18
5 - 11
5.4.4
Label
End of label
After printing the last label, insert a new label roll.
1
Insert label roll
5
Open the side cover and printer lid, see

page 5 - 8.
Open the thermal print head,
see page 5 - 10.
Remove the label roll from the take-up
pin. 3 .
Pull the red peel-off unit 6 outwards.
Pull the backing paper off the take-up

pin. 1
Pull 5 labels off the backing paper of the

new label roll.
Place the new label roll
take-up pin. 3 .
on the
2
Insert the backing paper in accordance

with the direction of the paper and attach
it to the take-up pin. 1 .
The Backing paper must be positioned
on collar. 2
Press the red peel-off unit 6 inwards.
Fig. 31: BC II 100 Label printer

Turn the take-up pin 1 manually until
the first label is peeled off.
Close the thermal print head, see page
5 - 10.
Close the side cover and printer lid, see
page 5 - 8.
5 - 12
6.111.98.5.01.18

1
Paper track in label printer

1
11
10
Take-up arbor for backing paper
Collar
Holding arbor
Label roll
Deflection pin with red adjustable ring
Thermal strip
Printer roller
Label detachment shaft
Deflection pin
10
Transport roller
11
Deflection roller with adjustable ring
9
8
7
6
Abb. 32: Paper track in label printer /

BCII800
1
1
Take-up arbor for backing paper
Collar
Holding arbor
Label roll
Deflection pin with red adjustable ring
Thermal strip
Printer roller
Label detachment shaft
Deflection pin
10
10
9
8
5
7
Transport roller
Abb. 33: Paper track in label printer /
BCII100/200
Set width of paper

Adjust the red adjustable ring 5 to the
deflection roller by pushing it to the size
of the label.
This is necessary for each paper change
and when changing the paper width.
Fig. 34: Adjustable ring
6.111.98.5.01.18
5 - 13
5
5
5 - 14
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
Operation
6.1
Switching on device
The mains switch<On-Off>
is located
on the left side of the scale in the case of BCII 100 / BCII 200
on the right side of the scale in the case of BCII 800.
6
The scale should not be loaded.

Press mains switch <On-Off>.
Boot appears in the display.
The display test occurs automatically.
All digits and symbols are displayed for approx. 5 sec..
The weight value display is then automatically set to zero 0.000 with the
scale unloaded and is ready for weighing.
6.2
Switch off device

Press mains switch <On-Off>.
The display goes dark after a short time.
6.3
Zerosetting device
After switching on the scale the weight display ranges automatically at zero 0.000 kg
provided that the scale is unloaded.
The scale has an automatic reset device, so that minor zero point changes are
compensated automatically.
The weight value display can (if the display is not set to zero) be reset again with the scale
unloaded.
) ]
0
Press <Zerosetting>.
The weight value display indicates 0,000 kg.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6-1
Operation
6.4
Operating options
Operating processes marked with an * are not available for all country versions.
Different operating types can be set in the device:
1. Multi-operating mode
6
see page
6-2
2. Self-service operation
see page 6 - 3
3. Quick-service operation
see page 6 - 4
4. Price labeling with manual triggering *
see page 6 - 6
5. Price labeling with automatic start *
see page 6 - 7
6.4.1
Multiple-operator mode
Multiple salespeople can operate the device at the same time.

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01
- Pr 510/ 02
- Pr 510/ 04
- Pr 520
Set multiple operator mode

Set ticket or label layout
Set type of paper
Set submenu 01 to 08.
General operating procedure

Place the article on the scale.
Input price
! @
Press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU2>.
or
Enter the unit price directly, e.g. EUR 2.98
PLU registration
1
Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

Ticket layout: The article is registered but not printed.
Label layout: The article is registered and the label is printed.
Printout of the article depends on the menu setting Pr
520/02.
Conclude sale
Press <total>.
1
Press the operator key, e.g. <OP1>.
Ticket layout: Item and total are printed on ticket.

Label layout: Printout of the article and the total depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02,
see page 7 - 95.
6-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.4.2
Operation
Self-service mode
_______________________________________________________________________
The article can only be called up via on PLU direct key.
-
Only PLU direct keys under which weight articles are stored can
be called up. Piece PLU, manual PLU or minus PLU cannot be
called up - you hear an acoustic signal.
- Reports cannot be created in this operating mode.

_______________________________________________________________________
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01
- Pr 510/ 02 1
- Pr 510/ 04 -1
Setting self-service mode

Setting label layout
Set label paper
Operating procedure:
Print article
! @
Press the PLU direct key of the article applied e.g. <PLU2>.
The label is printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6-3
6
Operation
6.4.3
Quick-service mode
Register with operator key

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -03
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr521
-0

Recording with operator key
6

Call up article
! @
Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU2>.
Register article and print

1
Press operator key <VK1>.

or
(dependent on country)
Press <Print>.
Register automatically
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -03
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr 521
-1

register automatically
Call up article, then register and print
! @

It is registered to Operator 1.
6-4
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
Automatic recording with fixed PLU

Customer-specific
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -03
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr 521
-1
- Pr 631/ 01
Set quick-service operation

Set label layout
Automatic recording
84-keyboard with 24 key self-service frame
6
Place product on scale.

Call up, record and print article
! @
Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU 2>.

Recording with respect to Operator 1.
The label is printed. The called up PLU remains unchanged until another PLU is
called up.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6-5
Operation
6.4.4
Price labeling with manual triggering *
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr 525/ 01
6
Price labeling with release by hand

Label layout
Setting labeling mode
Call up article
! @

The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.
Register article and print label

1

Remove the article from the scale.
Place the next article on the scale.

You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called
up, or until the <C> key is pressed.
Create batch sum label *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 03 -1
with addition
Press <total>.
The batch sum label is printed.
6-6
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.4.5
Operation
Price labeling with automatic start *
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -05
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
- Pr 525/ 01
Price labeling with automatic release

Label layout
Setting labeling mode
Call up article
6

''

The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.
Register article and print label

1

Remove the article from the scale.
The label is printed. Printing happens automatically after each change of weight.
You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called
up, or until the <C> key is pressed.
Create batch sum label *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 03 -1
with addition
Press <Total>.
The batch sum label is printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6-7
Operation
6.4.6
Piece price multi- label printing
A number of identical price per piece labels can be created in price labeling mode.
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04 or 05
- Pr525/ 02 -00-99
Price labeling
Time in sec. between printing of two labels
6
Input price.
$
Press the PLU direct key for unit

price e.g. <PLU4>.
The constant function
is activated.
1,50
Define number of labels

K
Press <Multiplication> .
Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.
00
1,50
15
1,50
14
1,50
00
1,50
0, 00
0,00
PLU registration
1
The labels are printed.

The number of labels being printed is
continually displayed.
End
Press <C>.
6-8
0,000
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.4.7
Operation
Fixed weight label multi-printing
A number of identical fixed weight labels can be created in price labeling mode.
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04 or 05
- Pr525/ 02 -00-99
Price labeling
Time in sec. between printing of two labels

$
Press the PLU direct key for fixed
weight e.g. <PLU5>.

The constant function
is activated.
6
0,500
12, 00
6,00
Define number of labels

+
Press and hold <Shift>. Then press
<Multiplication>
Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.
__
15
Press <Enter>
The number of labels is herewith confirmed.
PLU registration
1

The labels are printed.
0,500
12, 00
6,00
End
Press <C>.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6-9
Operation
6.5
Unit price input via 10-key keypad
_______________________________________________________________________
With key
you can switch between entry of unit price and PLU no.
Switchover depends on the setting in Pr 535.

_______________________________________________________________________
6.5.1
6
Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)
Unit price input Price/kg

Place article on the scale.
0,556
0,00
0,00
0,556
8,56
4,76
Enter the unit price.

Read off the selling price.
1
Register
e.g. on operator <VK1>.
The selling price is saved to the
buffer.
Price per piece manual input
Non-weighed
0,00
Press <non-weighed>.
Enter the price per piece,
Non-weighed
8,65
e.g. 8.65
1
Register
Multiplication of price per piece non-weighed
0,000
0,00
Non-weighed
0,00
Press <non-weighed>.
e.g. 8.65
[1]
0,00
Non-weighed
8,65
Non-weighed
Press <multiplication>.
_0
8,65
_5
8,65
0,00
0,00
Non-weighed
Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5.
1
Register
6 - 10
0,000
[1]
6.111.98.5.01.18
Entry of minus amount
-
Operation
Minus
0,00
Press <Minus amount>.

Minus
- 1,00
e.g. 1.00
1
Register
Multiplication of minus amount input

-
0,000
0,00
[1]
0,00
Minus
0,00
Press <Minus input>

Minus
e.g. 1.00
- 1,00
Minus
_0
- 1,00
_5
- 1,00
Minus
1
Register
6.111.98.5.01.18
0,000
0,00
[1]
0,00
6 - 11
6
Operation
6.6
Cancellation
If the sale is not yet completed (before final total), individual articles can be canceled.
Cancel lastly sold article
Op.
Pcs
1
6
[1]
Press <Cancellation>.
0,00
[1]
8,60
The last items are displayed.

St
The displayed items are canceled.
0,000
0,00
[1]
0,00
Search for article by Scrolling and cancelling

Several articles have already been sold; a defined article is now to be canceled.
St
1
Scroll until the article you want appears on the display.
St
The displayed items are canceled.
Quit cancellation
You start the Cancel function and want to abort this without starting a cancellation.
Pcs
1
Op.
[1]
0,00
[1]
8,60

Press <Clear>.
0,000
0,00
You have quit the Cancel function. The article is still registered.
6 - 12
[1]
0,00
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.7
Operation
Scroll function
After selling several articles (before total completion) the single articles can be checked in
the display by<Scrolling>
Pcs
1
6
<Scrolling>upwards.
The items are displayed in descending order.
Press <Clear>.
The scroll function is closed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 13
Operation
6.8
Constant
Fix unit price or tare value, or unit price and tare value, e.g. for several sequenced sales of
the same article. Depending on menu setting in Pr520/ 01.
PLU articles are fixated if you hold down the constant key, independent of the setting in Pr
520/ 01.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 01
6
Constant key function
Switch on fixing.
The symbol
Switch off fixing.
The symbol
6.9
illuminates before
before
or
or
(dependent on country).
goes out (depending on country)
Subtotal
The subtotal can be displayed (but not deleted) after the sale of one or more articles.
Press <Subtotal>.
1
Op.
[1]
0,00
Total
[1]
8,60
The subtotal is displayed.
6.10
Total
The final total occurs after the sale of one or more articles.
Op.
[1]
Press <Total>.
1
0,00
Total
The total is displayed.

The registered items and the total are printed.
The buffer for operator 1 is cleared.
6 - 14
[1]
8,60
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
6.11
Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU)
6.11.1
Calling up PLUs
Prerequisite
- Pr 110/ PLU no/ Submenu 1 to 14
PLU articles are created
The PLU call can be implemented by two methods:

-
Press the PLU direct key.

PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad.
6
PLU direct key

Stored PLUs can be called up directly via PLU direct keys.
Tab
The stored values for PLU 1 appear in the display.
Second level of PLU direct keys

With <Shift> twice as many PLUs can be accessed directly, as defined on the keyboard.
Tab
+ 1
Press and hold <Shift> and then press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU1>.
The stored values for PLU 51, for example, appear in the display.
Example 1:
There are 50 PLU direct keys on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift> +<PLU1> PLU 51 is
accessed.
Example 2:
30 PLU direct keys are defined with Pr 631 on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift>
+<PLU1> PLU 31 is accessed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 15
Operation
PLU input with ten-digit keyboard

The input depends on the menu setting Pr5 35. As an example, select PLU1:
Menu setting
- Pr 535/01 -0
- Pr 535/ 02
Ten-digit keyboard: Unit price input

Number of PLU input digits
Operating procedure
Press <Switching>,
6
PLU
___
PLU
__1
and PLU number on the 10-key

keypad, e.g. <1>.
Confirm with <Enter>.
Calf liver pat

0.002
-0,002
12,55
_______________________________________________________________________
PLU 1 is displayed.
Operating procedure
- If all digits are entered, it must not be confirmed with <Enter>. The
PLU is displayed immediately.
- If a delay time is set in Pr 535/ 06, the PLU is displayed after a time
delay. This must not be confirmed with <Enter>.
_______________________________________________________________________
or
Menu setting
- Pr 535/01 -1
- Pr 535/ 02
Ten-digit keyboard: PLU input

Number of PLU input digits
Operating procedure
Press the PLU number on the
ten-digit keypad, e.g. <1>.
PLU 1 is displayed.
6 - 16
PLU
___ ___1
Calf liver pat

-0,002
12,55
0.002
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.11.2
Operation
Operator sales with PLU
Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key.

Tab
Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.
6
Overwrite PLU unit price.
The unit price for the article (PLU unit price) is stored. When the PLU is called up the
saved unit price is displayed. If price-overwriting is permitted, the unit price may be
changed. If the PLU is called up again, the stored unit price is still valid.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06-1
Price overwriting permissible

Tab

Press <Switching>,
Enter the unit price, e.g. 20.30
Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.
Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces

Press a PLU direct key with stored
article type is Non-weighed or
Minus, e.g. <PLU 4>.
1,50
Press <Multiplication>.
Smoked sausage
0
1,50
Smoked sausage
22
1,50
0,000
0,00
Register
e.g. on operator 1 <VK1>.
6.111.98.5.01.18
Smoked sausage
0,00
[1]
6 - 17
Operation
Register manual weight input ( depending on country)

Menu setting
- Pr 606/ 07 -11xx
By Count and fixed weight on.
- Setting into operation see page 7 - 33
Press a PLU direct key with stored
PLU type is Non-weighed or
Minus, e.g. <PLU 4>.
6
Smoked sausage
0,118
3,49
0,40
Smoked sausage
0,000
3,49
0,00
Smoked sausage
0,220
3,49
0,76
0,000
0,00
Enter the known weight, e.g.

0.220kg.
Press <Enter>
Entry confirmed, selling price is
displayed.
1
Register
e.g. on operator 1 <VK1>.
6 - 18
0,00
[1]
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
6.12
Tare functions
6.12.1
Tare balancing for unknown tare values
_______________________________________________________________________
An unknown tare weight ( empties) is a non-article related tare which
is to be weighed and tared.
-
For scales under a 10 kg weighing range, the entire weighing

range can be tared.
For scales over a 10 kg weighing range, only up to max. 9.995 kg

(max. 4-digit) can be tared (country-dependent).
The tared value is subtracted from the total weighing range.
The tare command is only directly executed when the weight

display is stationary.
If an unknown tare was tared with key <Tare>, it cannot be

overwritten with a known tare (hand tare, PLU tare).
After balancing an unknown tare, a PLU call is possible with PLU

tare, but the PLU tare is ignored.
_______________________________________________________________________
Unknown tare
Weigh article as an empty with unknown weight.
Place the empty container on the scale.
The weight display 1 indicates the weight of
the empty container e.g.: 0,535 kg.
0,535
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,535
0,00
Press <tare>.
The tare display 2
indicates the weight of the
empty container, 0.535 kg.
The weight display 1 indicates zero.
0,000
NET
Fill the empty container with the article.

The weight display 1 indicates the net
weight of the article 2,000 kg.
The tare display 2 indicates the weight of
the empty container, 0.535 kg.
6.111.98.5.01.18
2,000
1
0,535
0,00
0,00
2
6 - 19
6
Operation
Batch tare (country-related)

Determine unknown tare, weigh article, add this to the tare weight and weigh the next
article net.
Place the empty container on the scale.
The weight display 1 indicates the
weight of the empty container, e.g.:
0,535 kg.
6
0,535
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,535
0,00
Press <Tare>.
The tare display 2 indicates the weight
of the empty container, 0.535 kg.
Fill the empty container with the article.

The weight display 1 indicates the net
weight of the article 0.800 kg.
The tare display 2 indicates the weight
of the empty container, 0.535 kg.
Press <tare>.
Weight of article and of empty container
are added to the new tare weight 2 .
0,000
NET
0,800
0,00
2
NET
0,000
1
0,535
0,00
1,353
0,00
0,00
2
For scales under 10 kg you can tare the entire

weighing range.
6 - 20
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.12.2
Operation
Tare balancing for known tare values
_______________________________________________________________________
Known tare
-
When weighing a packaged article, the tare value must be known

(packaging/product-related tare).
For multiple-division scales, the known tare must always be located

within the smallest division range (country-dependent).
A known (input) tare cannot be overwritten by an unknown

(weighed) tare.
The known tare can be input by 2 methods:

1. Manual tare
2. Tare with PLU tare
_______________________________________________________________________
Manual tare (country-related)

_______________________________________________________________________
Manual taring is not allowed in various countries.
_______________________________________________________________________
Prerequisite
- The scale should not be loaded. Weight value 0,000 kg.
0,00
_,___
0,00
0,00
_,_52
0,00
0,00
0,052
0,00
Press <Tare>.
The manual tare input is opened.
0,000
Enter the known tare value, e.g.

0,052 kg.
0,000
Press <Tare>.
The input tare value is accepted.
The display shows the tare 2 value and
the net weight value 1 .
NET
-0,052
1
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 21
6
Operation
PLU tare
Assign known tare value in menu Pr 110 to the respective PLU article.
Menu setting
- Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03
Enter article-related tare values
The PLU tare value is activated and displayed via the PLU call.
6
Tab
Press e.g. <PLU1>.
Calf liver pat

NET
-0,002
0,00
0.002
0,00
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4

Menu setting
- Pr 540
T1
Allocate known tare values to the tare keys
Press e.g. <Fixed tare T1>.

The saved tare value is displayed.
NET
-0,004
0,00
0,004
0,00
Tare clearing
1. Manual
Unload the scale.
Press <T>.
The display indicates zero.
2. Automatically
Register article, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

Unload the scale.
The display indicates zero. The unit price is also deleted.
6 - 22
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.12.3
Operation
Operator tare
An operator can save a tare value on an operator key. This tare value can be called up
any time.
Prerequisite
- Pr 630
- Pr 630
Key <Operator Tare> must exist.

Key <Save Operator Tare> must exist.
Save tare value weighed

Save tare value of an empty container on operator key e.g. <OP1>.
F12
6
Place empty container on scale.
0,060
0,00
0,00
<Press Save Operator Tare>.
Op.
0,060
0,00
0,00
0,000
0,00
-0,060
0,00
0,060
0,00
0,060
0,00
0,000
0,00
0,00
<Press Save Operator Tare>.
Op.
0,000
0,00
0,00
Press operator key<OP1>.
Op.
0,000
0,00
-,- - 0,00
0,00
0,070
0,00
-0,070
0,00
0,070
0,00
0,000
0,00
0,00

Tare value is displayed.
Remove empty container from scale.
Press
Tare key <T>.
The tare display is deleted. The tare
value is saved under operator key
<OP1>.
Save tare value entered

F13
The input field is displayed.

Enter tare value, e.g. 0.070kg.
Press tare key <T>.
Oper.
0,000
Press tare key <T>.

The tare display is deleted. The tare
value is saved under operator key
<OP1>.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 23
Operation
Call up operator tare saved

Scale is unloaded and in untared condition.
F13
Press<Operator Tare>.
Oper. is displayed.
6 - 24
0,00
0,00
0,00
0,070
0,00

The saved tare value is displayed.
6
Op.
0,000
-0,070
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.13
Operation
Assisted sales with ticket
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01
Multi-operator mode
- Pr 510/ 02 -0
Ticket layout
Set the ticket paper at the label printer
- Pr 510/ 04 -0
Ticket paper
Example: Operator 1 sells various articles that are programmed in the scale, cancels the last
article sold and concludes the sale with the total.
Apply article on scale
Tab
Call up article (weighed) with PLU

direct key e.g. <PLU1>.
Register article on <OP1>
.
1
Remove product from the scale.

2
! @
Call up next article (hand),

e.g. <PLU 2>.
Call up next article (minus),
''
.
4
e.g. <PLU 3>.

1
.
Fig. 35: Print example
St
Open cancellation function.
Press operator key<OP1>
St
Confirm cancellation
Last item is canceled 4 .
Open total printing.

1
Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed, see printing example.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 25
6
Operation
6.14
Talon
The talon includes the number of items and the total. It helps the operator check
everything later. The talon is automatically printed after the total printout. A delay of
between 1 and 99 seconds can occur.
The delay can be interrupted by pressing the <Total> key. The talon is then printed
immediately.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 06 -01 up to 99 seconds delay in printing
6
Ticket counter
Operator number
Total
No. of items
Fig. 36: Talon example
6.15
Print ticket upon request
In multi-operation mode the ticket printout can be triggered after sales process is finished,
if requested. If the key combination<Shift> and <OP> is not pressed, the total occurs only
in the display.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 11 -0
Print ticket only upon request
Operating procedure: Ticket printing upon request

Tab
Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key
e.g. <PLU1>.
Calf
liver pat
NET
0,498
12,55
0.002
6,25
Register article on <OP1>.
Press<Total>
Total
6,25
The total is displayed.

On request:
+ 1
<Press> Shift and press then operator key <OP1>.

The ticket is printed.
6 - 26
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.16
Operation
Repeat ticket
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 07 -1
with -Repeat ticket-
The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.

Prerequisite
- Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.
2
+ 1
6
Press and hold <Shift>. Then

press operator key 1 <OP1>
A copy is printed.
You can tell the copy from the
original by the asterisk 1 after the
ticket number 2 .
Fig. 37: Repeat ticket
6.17
Open ticket again
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 08 -1
with -Re-open ticket-
If the customer requires further items after printout of the ticket, a completed ticket can be
re-opened.
There are 2 ways of opening a ticket again.
-
Open the last ticket via the operator key.

Open a ticket via the ticket number
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 27
Operation
6.17.1
Open the last ticket via the operator key.
Prerequisite
- Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.
Open the last ticket:
Ctrl
Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

____
press <Enter>.
6
Press operator key e.g.
OP1<.>
[1]
0,000
0,00
0,00
The last ticket is now open. Additional articles may now be sold.
Finalize the re-opened ticket:
Press <Total>.
Press <OP1>.
Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.
6.17.2
Open the ticket via ticket number
Open ticket again:

Ctrl
Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

press <Enter>.
____
Enter the ticket number<8>
___8
press <Enter>
[1]
0,000
0,00
0,00
Ticket no. 8 is open again. The operator number is shown in the display.
Additional articles can be sold via the displayed operator number.
Finalize the re-opened ticket:
Press <Total>.
1
Press e.g.<OP1>.
Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.
6 - 28
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.17.3
Operation
Overwrite VAT from PLU
A VAT rate is assigned to PLU. If PLU is called up, a different VAT rate can be assigned to
the PLU with the VAT key.
Prerequisite
- Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 20 -1 The PLU is assigned to a VAT rate number from 1-5.
- Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 -1 The VAT can be overwritten.
- Pr630
The VAT key can be found on the keyboard.
- Pr631/ 03
re-programmed keyboard is set
6
Tab
Call up article with PLU direct key, e. g. <PLU 1> with VAT number 1 (19%)
II
Press VAT key, e. g. with VAT number 2 (7%)

Article is registered with 7% VAT
Press<Total>
The ticket is printed. After <Total> VAT from PLU is assigned to article.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 29
Operation
6.18
Serviced selling with label layout
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01
- Pr 510/ 02
- Pr 510/ 03
- Pr 520/ 02
6
-01
-1
-1
-2
Multi-operator mode
Label layout
with addition of customer total
Only print article label
Example:
Operator <OP1> sells different articles that are programmed in the scales, and
cancels the article last sold.
Place article on the scale.
Tab
Call up article (weighed) via PLU direct key
e.g. <PLU1>.
The label is printed immediately.

Remove article from the scale.
! @
Call up next article (hand),
e.g. <PLU 2>.

''
Call up next article (minus), e.g. <PLU 3>.

St
Open cancellation function.

Cancel
St
Last item is canceled.

No label is printed for a cancellation.
Display total
1
Press <Total> and operator e.g. <OP1>

in sequence.
The total is displayed. No total label is printed.
6 - 30
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
By-Count
6.19
By Count article
_______________________________________________________________________
The By Count article type must be put into operation, see page
7 - 33.
_______________________________________________________________________
Sell By Count article
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -3
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
Unit price input (price per package)

By Count article type
Number of pieces per package
with back calculation (price per piece is printed on label)
Operating procedure
$
Call up by-count article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.
Smoked sausage
3
1,50
The label with the package price 1

and the price per piece 2 is printed.
The price per piece is not printed on the
ticket.
Fig. 38: By Count label (1)
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 31
6
Operation
By-Count
By Count with mandatory input of number of pieces
The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. The package price is
recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- Pr 110/ 16 -1
Article type by-count (price per package in relation to

with back calculation (price per piece)
with mandatory input
6
Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces
$
Call up by-count article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.
Input of number of pieces is required
Smoked sausage
Quantity
3
3
1,50
1,50
Enter number of pieces, e.g. <5>

The new number of pieces per package
and the calculated package price are
displayed.
1
Quantity
5
2,50

The label with the new package
price 1 and the price per piece 2 is
printed.
ticket.
2
6 - 32
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
By-Count
By Count with overwriting of package price

The set package price can be overwritten. The price per piece is recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- PR 110/ 06 -1

6
Operating procedure with overwriting of package price

$
Call up by-count article via PLU
direct key e.g. <PLU 4>.

Press <Switch>
The package price is set to
0.00
Enter new package price
e.g.5.00
Smoked sausage
3
1,50
Smoked sausage
3
0,00
Smoked sausage
3
5,00
The label with the new package

price 1 and the price per piece 2 is
printed.
ticket.
2
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 33
Operation
By-Count
By Count with overwriting of package price and number of pieces
The stored package price is overwritten. This changes the price per piece. The stored
number of pieces per package is then overwritten. The package price and the price per
piece are recalculated.
6
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- PR 110/ 06 -1

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price and number of pieces

$

Press <Switch>
0.00
e.g.<5.00>
Smoked sausage
3
1,50
Smoked sausage
3
0,00
Smoked sausage
3
5,00
Smoked sausage
0
5,00
Smoked sausage
5
8,33
Press key <Multiplication>

The number of pieces is set
to 0
Enter number of pieces,
e.g<5>
The new number of pieces and
the calculated package price are
displayed.
1

The label with the calculated package
price 1 and the calculated price per
piece 2 is printed.
ticket.
2
1
6 - 34
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
By-Count
By Count with overwriting of number of pieces and package price
The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. This changes the package
price. The final package price is then entered. The price per piece is recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03
number of pieces)
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- PR 110/ 15 -1
- PR 110/ 06 -1

6
Operating procedure with overwriting of number of pieces and package price
$
Smoked sausage
3
1,50
Smoked sausage
0
1,50
Smoked sausage
5
2,50
Smoked sausage
5
0,00
Smoked sausage
5
0,75
Press key <Multiplication>

The number of pieces is set
to 0.
e.g<5>
The package price changes.
Press <Switch>
0.00
e.g.<0.75>
1

The label with the entered final
package price 1 and the calculated
price per piece is printed. 2
ticket.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 35
Operation
Fixed weight
6.20
Fixed weight
The stored fixed weight of the article is used for price calculation instead of the weighed
weight.
_______________________________________________________________________
The fixed weight article type must be put into operation like the By
Count article type, see page 7 - 33.
_______________________________________________________________________
6
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/PLU no./17
Unit price input (price per fixed weight)

Type fixed weighed
Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)
Operating procedure
F
22
Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU 22>.
Tin of sausage
0,125
2,20

The ticket with selling price
fixed weight is printed. 2
0,28
and
2
1
Fig. 43: Fixed weight (1)

Fixed weight with mandatory input
The fixed weight must always be entered in the sale.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1
6 - 36
Type fixed weighed

with mandatory input of fixed weight
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
Fixed weight
Operating procedure with mandatory input of fixed weight

F
Call up fixed weight article via
22
PLU direct key e.g.<PLU 22>.
Tin of sausage
0,125
220
Fixed weight input is required.
Fixed weight
0,000
Enter new fixed weights,
Fixed weight
0,150
e.g<0150>.
0,28
6
Press <Enter> key.

The new fixed weight and the
calculated selling price are
displayed.
Tin of sausage
0,150
220
0,33
The new fixed weight 1 and the selling

price 2 are printed.
Fixed weight with overwriting of unit price

The stored unit price can be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/PLU no./17
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1
6.111.98.5.01.18
Type fixed weighed

6 - 37
Operation
Fixed weight
Operating procedure for fixed weight with unit price overwrite
The selling price is determined with the new unit price and the stored fixed weight.
F
22

Press <Switch>
6
The price is set to 0.00.

Enter new unit price, e.g.<200>.
Tin of sausage
0,125
2,20
0,28
Tin of sausage
0,125
0,00
0,00
Tin of sausage
0,125
2,00
0,25

The new unit price 2 and the
calculated selling price 1 are printed.
Change fixed weight

Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
- Pr 110/PLU no./17
6 - 38
Type fixed weighed

6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
Fixed weight
Operating procedure for changing fixed weight

F
22
Tin of sausage
0,125
2,20
0,28
The selling price disappears and
the fixed weight is set to 0.000.
Enter new fixed weight,

e.g<0150>.
Tin of sausage
0,000
2,20
6
Tin of sausage
0,500
2,20
1,10
The calculated selling price is

displayed.
The new fixed weight 1 and the

6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 39
Operation
By Count fixed weight
6.21
In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.
Sell By Count fixed weight article
6
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 07-5
By Count fixed weight article type (fixed weight and
price refer to pieces per package)
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)
Operating procedure
D
21
Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU

direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.
Tin of sausage
0,250
3
2,10

1
Fixed weight
are printed.
and selling price
Fig. 47: By Count fixed weight (1)
6 - 40
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation
By Count fixed weight with mandatory input

The stored fixed weight per package must be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
- Pr 110/ 19-1

By Count fixed weight article type
with mandatory input of fixed weight
6
Operating procedure for By Count fixed weight with mandatory input
D
Call By Count fixed weight article
21
via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.

Fixed weight input is required.
Tin of sausage
0,250
3
2,10
Fixed weight
0,000
Enter new fixed weight,

e.g<0500> g.
Fixed weight
0,500
Press <Enter> key.

The selling price remains the
same. The price per kg changes
but is not displayed.
Tin of sausage
0,500
3
2,10

2
The altered price per kg 1 and the

new fixed weight 2 are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 41
Operation

Change number of pieces
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
6

By Count fixed weight type
Operating procedure for changing the number of pieces

D
21

Tin of sausage
0,250
3
2,10
Tin of sausage
0,250
0
2,10
Tin of sausage
0,417
5
3,50
The number of pieces is set to 0.

e.g<5>
The calculated selling price and
the new fixed weight are displayed
immediately.
1

1
The new fixed weight 1 and the

6 - 42
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operation

By Count fixed weight with mandatory input of number of pieces
The stored number of pieces per package must be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
- Pr 110/ 16-1

with mandatory input of number of pieces
6
Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces
D
21

Input of number of pieces is required
Tin of sausage
0,250
3
2,10
Number of pieces
0,250
3
2,10
Number of pieces
0,583
7
4,90

e.g<7>
The calculated selling price and
the new fixed weight are displayed
immediately.
1

The new package price 1 and the
number of pieces 2 are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 43
Operation

By Count fixed weight with overwriting of the package price
The set package price can be overwritten. The price per kg is recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -5
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
- Pr 110/ 17
- Pr 110/ 06 -1
6

By Count fixed weight article type
Price overwrite permissible
Operating procedure with overwriting of package price

D
21

Tin of sausage
0,250
3
2,10
Tin of sausage
0,250
3
0,00
Tin of sausage
0,250
3
5,00
Press <Switch>
0.00.
e.g.<500>

The new package price 1 and the new
kg price 2 are printed.
6 - 44
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.22
Operation
Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 04
- Pr 520/ 05
- Pr 550/ 12 -1
Cash register function

Payment in/out
Print out amount paid in/due on ticket
Operating procedure
Record the article.
Press <Total>.
6
Op.
[1]
0,00
1
Press the operator key, e.g.

<OP1>.
Total
[1]
2,71
The customer pays the exact amount

If exact amount, close sales
with total key.
Payment out
[1]
0,00
The ticket is printed and the cash drawer opens.
Customer pays, for example with 5.00

Enter the amount.
Payment in
[1]
5,00
Delete the incorrect entry with <C> and enter the amount again.
Payment out
[1]
*
Save input.
2,29
The ticket is printed, the cash
drawer opens and the change is
indicated.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 45
Operation
6.23
Product with data of origin
When selling beef, for example, the customer should be provided with information on
origin, rearing, place of slaughter and possibly breed. The beef is marked with a
traceability number, which is entered when sold.
Traceability data is printed on the ticket or label for the serviced selling mode and price
labeling.
6
The weight of the sold meat and the number of items are saved in the traceability data
sales report.
There are two possible operating procedures for products with data of origin:
-
Input traceability no. manually.

Use defined traceability no.
6.23.1
Sale with manual input of the traceability number
Prerequisite
Traceability texts have to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no. 10.
PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1
- Pr 515/ 03 - 1
with traceability number

Input traceability no. manually
Operating procedure
Place the beef, for example, on the scales.
Tab
Press the PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).
If the product contains traceability
data, the weight, unit price and
selling price are only displayed
briefly.
0,206
A prompt to input the abbreviated

traceability number then appears.
12,55
2,59
12,55
2,59
__
Enter the traceability number, e.g. 02.
02
Traceability number 02 corresponds to PLU number 9902.

Confirm the entry.
The weight, unit price and selling
are are displayed again.
1
6 - 46
0,206
Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.23.2
Operation
Sale with fixed traceability number.
Prerequisite
A traceability text has to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no./10.
PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1
- Pr 515/ 04 - 00-99
- Pr 515/ 03 - 2
with traceability number

Define traceability number
Use defined traceability no.
6
All products (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text from the
set traceability number.
Operating procedure
Place the beef, for example, on the scales.
Tab
Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).

If the product includes traceability data, the set traceability number is
automatically processed. The weight, unit and selling price are displayed. The
traceability numbers is not displayed.
Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.

The sold quantity is booked separately in the traceability data sales report.
6.111.98.5.01.18
6 - 47
Operation
6
6 - 48
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Programming
Menus marked with an asteriks *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all
country versions.
7.1
Initial display
If the display is assigned, press <C>.

1
Net weight display
Unit price display
Selling price display
0,000
0,00
kg T kg
Price/kg
7
0,00
Price
Fig. 52: Initial display
7.2
Menu password
No password
The device is supplied without a password.
Menu call-up is carried out with having to enter a password.
PASS
______
With password
Activate password entry, see Pr 690 on page
7 - 159.
Once the password input has been activated, a
correct password has to be entered.
The password consists of 6 figures.
PASS
An symbol appears in the display for each

figure that is entered.
If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7-1
Programming
7.3
Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu
Menu is called up from the scales' initial display.

General programming sequence
1.
Menu call-up
Press the <Mod>key.
2.
Menu selection
Enter the program number via the 10-key keypad.
Menu text is displayed. Confirm via the <Enter> key.
3.
Submenu selection
Enter the submenu number or scroll to submenu using the arrow keys and confirm by
pressing <Enter>.
4.
Make settings
Confirm settings with <Enter> key.
5.
Exit menu
Press the <Mod>key.
7
Example:
Menu call-up
Mod
Pr
Menu call-up
Menu selection
Pr115
Select menu
Print PLU list
The menu text is displayed.

confirm
PLU list: all texts

01
No. and text of first submenu item are displayed, e.g. 01

Submenu selection
Enter submenu no., e.g. 02
PLU list: only one text

02
or
Scroll in menu using arrow keys.
confirm
7-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Make settings
Enter beginning of range,

02
____11-999999
e.g. PLU No. 11

confirm
Enter end of range

02
000011-____25
e.g. PLU No.25

confirm
7
The list, from PLU no. 11 to PLU no. 25, is printed.

Exit menu
Mod
Exit menu.
The scale returns to the initial display.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7-3
Programming
Input correction
Error inputs can be undone by pressing key <Clear>.
Press key <Escape> to go to previous level, the old values remain intact.
Key <Clear>to clear entry.
Esc
Use key <Escape> to go to previous level.
_______________________________________________________________________
If single items were registered and no total has been created, it is not
possible to switch to the programming mode.
7
The operator accounts have to be closed.

_______________________________________________________________________
7.4
Initial scale setting
Set the type of paper to be used.
Pr
Call up menu
Pr505
Select menu
1
Pr505
Select type of paper
0= Ticket paper
1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)
confirm
Set the desired main operating mode.

Set main operating mode and print layout in menu Pr510,
see page 7 - 87 and 7 - 111.
e.g. setting multi-operating mode
and ticket layout
Design ticket
Set paper type
Pr510/01 -01
Pr 510/ 02-0
Pr 550, see page 7 - 111
Pr 510/ 04, see page 7 - 88.
Set the required switching operation mode.

Set switching operation mode and print layout in menu Pr511,
see page 7 - 89 and 7 - 118.
e.g. setting multi-operating mode
and label layout
Design label
Set paper type
7-4
Pr511/01 -01
Pr 511/ 02-1
Pr 555, see page 7 - 118
Pr 511/ 04, see page 7 - 90.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7.5
Programming
Overview of list
Requirement
- Insert the ticket paper for scales with a label printer.
- Pr 510/ 04 -0 Select ticket paper
7.5.1
PLU article
print, see Pr 115, page 7 - 53
Create see Pr 110, on page7 - 42
Scale number
Unit price
Tare
11
10
Article with data of origin

PLU text
Shelf-life days
Barcode
Product group number
10
PLU number / article number
11
Date and time
9
8
7
4
6
Fig. 53: Article list
7.5.2
Header and footer texts

print, see Pr 205/ 02 on page 7 - 58
Scale number
Enter header or footer text
Text number
Date and time
3
2
Fig. 54: Header and footer text list
6.111.98.5.01.18
7-5
7
Programming
7.5.3
Additional texts
see Pr 205/ 01 on page 7 - 58
Scale number
Supplement. text
Text number
Date and time
7
2 1
Fig. 55: Suppl. text list
7.5.4
Scrolling message
Print, see Pr 205/ 03
Create see Pr 202,
Scale no
Scrolling message text
Scrolling message number
Date and time
page 7 - 58
on page7 - 57
4
Fig. 56: Scrolling message list
7.5.5
PLU direct keys
print, see Pr 536, page 7 - 107

change see Pr 535 on page 7 - 104
PLU number (article no.)
PLU direct key
Fig. 57: PLU direct keys
7-6
6.111.98.5.01.18
7.5.6
Programming
Barcode structure
, see Pr 211,
Create see Pr 210,
Structure number
Barcode format
Field 1 code constant
4
5
Content field 1
Field 2 part string from PLU
No. of digits for field 2
Field 3 price
Conversion of variable values
page7 - 65
on page7 - 61
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8 9
Fig. 58: Barcode structures
7.5.7
BLD labels
BLD= Bizerba Label Designer.

Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.
Printout of BLD label numbers.
Print list, see Pr 220/01, see page7 - 71
Delete list, see Pr 225/01, see page 7 - 71.
Create layout with BLD. Example of BLD label see page 7 - 119.
Scale number
Label name (enter in BLD)
Label name (enter in BLD)
Date and time
Fig. 59: Example of BLD label list
6.111.98.5.01.18
7-7
Programming
7.5.8
Logos
Printout of logo saved in the scales.

_______________________________________________________________________
Logos can be designed in the BLD. The BLD logos are given a
number and sent to the scales where they are stored.
If a logo exists in the scales with the same number, the existing logo is
replaced by the BLD logo.
If this BLD logo is deleted in the scales (Pr 225/02) the previous logo
stored under this number is available again.
7
_______________________________________________________________________
Print, see Pr 220/ 02 on page 7 - 71
Delete see Pr 225/02, see page 7 - 72
Scale number
Logo name
Logo
Logo ID
Date and time
4
2
3
Fig. 60: Example of logo list
7-8
6.111.98.5.01.18
7.5.9
Programming
VAT rates
Printing saved VAT rates.

Print see Pr 231/ 01 on page 7 - 74
Delete see Pr 231/02, see page 7 - 74
VAT number
VAT rate
VAT text
Including or excluding VAT
7
6.111.98.5.01.18
7-9
Programming
7.6
General procedure for text input
Texts are entered in the program menus:

Pr 200 supplementary text,
7
Pr 201 header and footer texts
PR 202 scrolling message
Pr110/ PLU no. / 10 PLU article texts
Font type
Line number (line 1)
Available memory space (in byte)
Pr200
C 1500 LI H3
Fig. 61: Example of display

Font H
HThe font is determined by the selected layout (ticket or label)
H15 The font type is 15 (Script 15).
Change font
Clr +
Press and hold <CTRL>. Then press <0>.
Enter the font, e.g.15
Press key<Enter>.
l
H1
_15_
^15;I
C 1496
The font is now Script 15. Also for

the following lines
L1
H 15
_______________________________________________________________________
The font can be changed any time. Within the text of a line or in the
next line. The last font set applies until the next change.
_______________________________________________________________________
The overview of font types (script) in the scale
can be printed out via Pr 702.
Fig. 62: Font 4-9
7 - 10
6.111.98.5.01.18
Change line
Programming
CR
Press key <CR> for the next
45
Pr200
C 1499 L2 H15
line.
Change up and down between existing lines.
Save entry
Pr200
Press key<Enter>.
C 1499 L2 H15
7
Keys with alpha and special characters
Lower case is generally selected by pressing the key.
Character a:
A
Press key<19>.
19
Character A:
A
+ 19
Press and hold key <Shift>,

then press key <19>.
If there are 2 characters on a key, these must be called up as follows:

Character :
?
Press key<39>.
39
Character ?:
Ctrl
+ 39
Press and hold key <Control>.

then press key<39>.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 11
Programming
Special character:
Example of decimal input of unicode characters.
Character I:
Pr200
C 1500 LI H-
Ctrl
Press and hold <Ctrl>.

then press <4>.
l
UCd
_____
UCd
__8364
Press the decimal figures for

the unicode for the desired
character.
7
l
|
C 1498 LI H-
Enter example of hex value input.

Character I:
Pr200
C 1500 LI H-
Ctrl
Press and hold <Ctrl>.

then press <2>.
A
19 30
7 - 12
l
UCH
____
requested character.
UCH
_20Ac
Enter the hex value for the
C 1498 LI H-
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
CTRL Sequences in the editor
Shortcuts
Function
CTRL + 0
Change font
CTRL + 1
Activate and deactivate Pinyin mode

Only for Chinese program
and dot seven display. 1
CTRL + 2
Enter Unicode hexadecimal number
CTRL + 3
GB 3212 mode
Only for Chinese program
CTRL + 4
Enter Unicode decimal number
7
In Pinyin Mode there is an automatic switching in the Pinyin input, if a character A to Z

is selected in the Editor.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 13
Programming
Function keys of text input

delete final character
Delete line
Move cursor in text to the left or right
7
Control printout of current text line
Control printout of all text lines
Text example
Enter article text, e.g.: Racltte cheese
R
+ 13
19
30
27
Ctrl
acl
14
14
12
SP
tte
Space
44
K
+ 26
E
41
20 12
Cheese
Control printout: Racltte cheese
7 - 14
6.111.98.5.01.18
7.7
Programming
Overview of scrolling messages
Define scrolling message text

Define in Pr 202
Pr202
01
Select 202
Scrolling message for text number input
Pr202
02
01-99
l
Press <Enter> key.
7
C 500 LI H-
Scrolling message for text input,

e.g.
&Z, You are being served by &B04; Mr. Mller
For text input, see page 7 - 10.
Control characters:
&Z;= Display character-by-character
-
&W;= Display word-by-word (standard)
&Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)
&Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)
_______________________________________________________________________
To control the text, the control characters must be entered in
front of the text and concluded with a <; > semicolon. The
control characters can be entered at any point between the text.
_______________________________________________________________________
Scrolling message
Menu setting
- Pr 516/ 01 -01
Select scrolling text number.
Select display location e.g. 2= Scrolling message on operator
Pr 516/ 02 -2
and customer side
or
Pr 516/ 02 -1
side
or
Pr 516/ 02 -0
customer side
Pr 516/ 03 -1
6.111.98.5.01.18
Select display location e. g. 1= Scrolling message on operator
Select display location e. g. 0= Scrolling message on

Scrolling message starts with empty display
7 - 15
Programming
Barcode
7.8
Barcode overview
Procedure:
1.
Create barcode structure

-
Pr 210
Enter structure number
Pr 210/ 01 Define barcode format (EAN 13, code 128 or EAN 8)
Pr 210/ 02 Enter constant
- Pr 210/03 Define numeric value

_______________________________________________________________________
7
If several numeric values are defined for a barcode, Menu Pr

210/ 03 must be called up again for each value. Only press
numeric key <3> and confirm with <Enter>.
_______________________________________________________________________
-
Pr 210/ 03 Define another numeric value

Pr210/ 04 Save structure
Example
Structure number (Pr 210), code format (Pr 210/ 01) and constant ( Pr 210/ 02) are
entered.
Further operating procedure for numeric value input:
Pr210
03
01040
Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 01040 (price)
Pr210
04
Confirm input
Confirm submenu 03
Submenu 4 is displayed
Presskey <3>
Select submenu 03 again
Pr210
03
Pr210
03
12030
Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 12030 (department no.)
Confirm submenu 03
Confirm input
Confirm submenu 04
Pr210
04
l
04
C 291 L11
H-
Save code structure

The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure
must be re-entered from the beginning.
7 - 16
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Manufacturer code EAN 13
2.
Release barcode printing

Ticket
- Pr 550/ 01 Release barcode print on ticket for product, total and talon.
- Pr 550/ 02 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.
Label
- Pr 555/ 06 Release barcode print on label for article, total.
- Pr 555/ 07 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.
3.
Allocate barcode
The barcode can be produced for the following data:
Articles not saved in the scales:
- Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 215/02
-
Non-PLU non-weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/03
Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/ 04
Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 /05
7
Articles saved in the scales:

- Article (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110/PLU no./ 05
-
For all articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211/ 03
Barcode types:
see page 7 - 18
The manufacturer barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the
article, e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04.
Instore EAN 13 / EAN 8
see page 7 - 20
A code structure must be created for EAN 13 and EAN 8. Create in Pr 210.
Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an articele in Pr110/PLU no/05 or
all articles in Pr 211 /03.
The EAN 13 printout has 13 digits (12 digits for information and one check digit)
The EAN 8 printout has 8 digits (7 digits for information and one check digit)
Code 128
see page 7 - 26
A code structure must be defined for code 128. Creation in Pr210.
The code structure number from Pr210 is, e.g., assigned to an article in Pr110/05 or to all
articles in Pr211 /03.
The code 128 printout can be any width. The barcode is limited by the possible printing
area.
see page 7 - 19
The manufacturer barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the
article, e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 17
Programming

13 digits have to be entered for the EAN 13 manufacturer code.
Enter numbers 1400151300062.
The first digit 1 identifies the entry as

the manufacturer code and is not printed.
Code digit for code format
1= manufacturer code
Pr110
05
1 400151300062
Fig. 63: Entering the manufacturer code
7
The following 12 digits are converted into
a barcode and are printed as they are
entered 2 .
The last digit is a check digit created by
the scale 3 .
3
Fig. 64: Print manufacturer code
_______________________________________________________________________
There are different types of barcode. One of the most common
barcodes is the 13-digit code for consumer articles. The following
example shows how the barcode is broken down:
Country digit
Manufacturer
number
Article number
Check digit
The country digit indicates in which country a manufacturer has

applied for the barcode. The numbers 400 to 440, for example,
stand for Germany.
The manufacturer number provides information on the producer

and is issued by GS1 Germany.
The article number is specified by the manufacturer. Each article

has its own number and can therefore be identified worldwide.
The check digit is a number that has been calculated from all the
other digits. It helps to avoid reading errors in the scanner.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 18
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming

8 digits have to be entered for the EAN 13 manufacturer code.
1st digit = code format
Digits 2 to 8 = barcode digits
Digits 9 to 13 = fill with zeros.
Enter numbers 2400151200000.
The first digit 1 identifies the entry as

the manufacturer code and is not printed.
Code digit for code format
2= Manufacturer code EAN 8
Pr110
05
2 400151200000
7
Fig. 65: Entering the manufacturer code
The following 7 digits are converted into a

barcode and are printed as they are
entered 2 .
The last digit is a check digit created by
the scale 3 .
2
Fig. 66: Printout manufacturer code EAN 8
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 19
Programming
Instore code EAN 13
Instore code EAN 13

A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code.
The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales. The number
of digits per field is also defined in the structure.
Menu setting
- Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03
- Pr 210/ 04
7
Create structure
Check and save structure
12 digits must be defined for EAN 13.

The number of available 12 digits is divided into fields in the barcode structure. Each field
can be set individually in Pr210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The fields are counted from left to
right.
_______________________________________________________________________
Several encoded values (fields) can be set in a row, to do so
re-access submenu 02 or 03 .
The number of digits in all fields must be exactly 12.
If this is more or less, the structure is rejected.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 20
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Instore code EAN 13
Example: Code structure for in-store code EAN 13 with 3 fields

12 digits are available for printing. The 13th digit is a check number from the scale.
7
Fig. 67: Code digit (Field 1), Substring/Constant (Field 2), Selling Price (Field 3)
Menu
Input example
Note
Printing in field
Pr 210
02
Code structure number
Use this structure

number in Pr 110/
PLU no./ 05 or
Pr 211/ 03
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05
Pr 210/ 01
00002
Code EAN 13 with OCR
Pr 210/ 02
22
Code digit for price

2 Digits
Field 1 (code digit)
Pr 210/ 03
05040
Substring/Constant
4 Digits
Enter field 2 (sub

string) in
Pr 110/ PLU-No./
05 or
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05
Pr 210/ 03
01060
Selling price
6 Digits
Field 3 (Price)
Pr 210/ 04
6.111.98.5.01.18
Check and save struc

ture
7 - 21
Programming
Instore code EAN 13

Example:
Create barcode structure in Pr210
The following in-store barcode is to be printed:
Code digits price in Euro (22), substring from PLU (0815), price (total).
1
Barcode structure no. e.g. 02
Pr210
02
1
7
Define barcode format

Submenu 01
Pr210
2
Barcode types
01
10002
0= EAN 13; 1= code 128; 2= EAN 8
2
3 4
3
Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from PR550/02, Pr555/07 or from BLD layout.
4
OCR line
0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.
5
Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel
Define code digits (Field 1)

Submenu 02 (code constant)
5
e.g. 22 for price code in Euro according to
GS1 Germany
22
02
C 18 LI H-
Define substring (Field 2)

Submenu 03 (numeric code)
Pr210
6
Numeric code
03
05040
05= Substring from e.g. 110/05 (PLU):
6
7
8
or 215/ 02 (Non-PLU weighed)
or 215/ 03 (Non-weighed articles)
or 215/ 04 (Minus articles)
or 215/ 05 (Total)
7
Number of digits for field 2
04= four digits for constant
8
0=If in Numeric code <05>= part string was selected, <0> must always be enetered
for the conversion of the variable values.
7 - 22
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Instore code EAN 13
Define price barcode (Field 3)

Submenu 03 (Numeric code)
9
Numeric code (encoded value)
01= price
10
Number of digits for field 3

06= 6 digits for the price
11

0= Decimal places as per device setting
Pr210
03
01060
9
Check and adopt code structure

Confirm submenu 04
10 11
Pr210
04
C 302 L11
confirm
7
H-
Assign instore code code structure e.g in Pr 215/ 05 (total)

12
Code digit for barcode type

0= Instore code
13
Barcode structure no. e.g. 02

The code structure is saved in Pr 210 under
this number.
14
Constant is freely selectable

e.g. 4-digit article no. 0815
The number of digits depends on the
number of digits for the part string 7 .
15
The remaining digits are without meaning,

but must be assigned.
Input: 000000
16
Scale check digit
12
13 14
15
Pr215
05
0 02 0815000000
14
15
16
Fig. 68: Printout example for instore code

EAN 13
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 23
Programming
Instore code EAN 13

Example:
Pr110
In-store code for a PLU no.
05
0 02 0815 000000
Printing of the barcode depends on the setting in the barcode structure.
6-digit coded value without check digit
7
Field 1: 2 digits for code constant

e.g. 22 for price code in Euro
Field 2: 4 digits for part string

e.g. article number 0815
10
Field 3: 6 digits for coded value

e.g. price 0022, 14
16
Scale check digit
10
16
Fig. 69: Example of EAN 13 in-store code

without check digit
5 digit coded value with check digit

5
Field 1: 2 digits for code constant

e.g. 22 for price code in Euro
Field 2: 4 digits for part string

e.g. article number 0815
17
Field 3:1 digit check digit

for encoded value
10
Field 4: 5 digits for coded value

e.g. price 022, 14
16
Scale check digit
17
10
16
Fig. 70: Example of EAN 13 in-store code

with check digit
7 - 24
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Instore code EAN 8
Instore code EAN 8

A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code EAN 8.
The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales.
Menu setting
- Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03
- Pr 210/ 04
Create structure
7 digits must be defined for EAN 8.

_______________________________________________________________________
The number of digits in the structure must be exactly 7.
7
If there are more or less, the structure is rejected.

_______________________________________________________________________
Example: Code structure for instore code EAN 8
There are 7 digits available for printing. The 8th digit is a check digit from the scale.
1
Selling price
Scale check digit
Fig. 71: Instore code EAN 8

Menu
Pr 210
Input example
02
Pr 210/ 01
20002
Pr 210/ 02
21
Pr 210/ 03
01050
Pr 210/ 04
6.111.98.5.01.18
Note
Code structure number to be used in
Pr 110/ PLU no./ 05
or
Pr 211/ 03
Pr 215/ 02 Non-PLU weighed
Pr 215/ 03 Non-PLU non-weighed
articles
Pr 215/ 04 Non-PLU minus articles
Pr 215/ 05 Total
Code EAN 8 with OCR
2 Digits
Selling price
5 Digits
7 - 25
Programming
Code 128
Code 128
Code 128 contains the information in the dashes and spaces. The dash widths and the
width of the spaces vary, depending on the code content.
ASCII characters from ASCII 0 to ASCII 127 can be represented. This includes the
character set A, B and C. The specifications of code 128 can be found in Directive EN
799.
The length of the code is variable.
Menu setting
- Pr 210/ structure number/ 01, 02, 03
Create code
- Pr 210/ 04
Check digit and save if valid
7
The structure of Code 128 is defined in Pr 210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03.

The code constant is defined in Pr 210/ 02.
The encoded values are selected in Pr 210/ 03, see page 7 - 62.
_______________________________________________________________________
Several encoded values can be set in a row, to do so re-call
submenu 02 or 03.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 26
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Code 128
Example: Code structure for code 128 with 6 fields

Any number of fields
7
1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 72: Text (Field 1), Selling price (Field 2), PLU no. (Field 3), Weight (Field 4), Unit price
(Field 5), Department number (Field 6)
Menu
Input example
Note
Printing in field
Pr 210
10
Use this structure

number in Pr 110/
05 or
Pr 211/ 03
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05
Pr 210/ 01
1000
Code 128 with OCR
Pr 210/ 02
ABCD
Code constant
Field 1 (Text)
Pr 210/ 03
01040
Selling price
with4 digits
Field 2
(Selling price)
Pr 210/ 03
06040
PLU no.
with4 digits
field 3 (PLU no)
Pr 210/ 03
02040
Weight
with4 digits
Field 4 (Weight)
Pr 210/ 03
08040
Unit price
with4 digits
Field 5 (Unit price)
Pr 210/ 03
12030
Department number
with3 digits
Field 6 (Dept. no.)
Pr 210/ 04
6.111.98.5.01.18
Check and save struc

ture
7 - 27
Programming
Code 128
Enter the code structure no. e.g. 10 after menu
access
Confirm code structure no.
Confirm submenu 01
Enter barcode format, e.g. 1000
7
Confirm barcode format

Confirm submenu 02
Enter code constant, e.g. ABCDEF
Pr 210
10
Pr210
01
Pr210
01
1000
Pr210
02
ABCDEF
02
C 14 LI H-
Pr210
03
Pr210
Confirm submenu 03
03
01040
Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 01040 (price)
Pr210
04
Confirm input
Confirm constant
Select submenu 03 again
Press <3>
Pr210
03
Pr210
03
12030
Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 12030 (department no.)
Pr210
04
Confirm input
Confirm submenu 03
Confirm submenu 04
l
04
C 291 L11
H-
Confirm input
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure
must be re-entered from the beginning.
7 - 28
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Code 128
Example:
Create structure for barcode 128
in Pr 210
The following barcode is to be printed:
Text, price, PLU no., weight, unit price, department no..
1
Barcode no. e.g. 10
Pr210
10
1
Define barcode format

Submenu 01
Pr210
2
Barcode types
01
1= Code 128; 0= EAN 13; 2= EAN 8
3
Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from Pr550/02 or Pr555/07.
4
OCR line
0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.
5
Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel
Enter text (Field 1)

Submenu 02 (code constant)
5
e.g. ABCD
Price (Field 2)
Submenu 03 (Numeric code)
6
Numeric code
01= price
7
Number of digits for price
04= four digits for price
8
PLU no. (Field 3)

6
Numeric code
06= PLU no.
7
Number of digit for PLU no.
04= four digits for PLU no.
8
0= as per device setting
6.111.98.5.01.18
10002
2
7
ABCD
02
C 16 LI H-
Pr210
03
01040
6
Pr210
03
06040
6
7 - 29
Programming
Code 128
Weight (Field 4)
6
Numeric code
02= Weight
7
Number of digits for weight
04= four digits for weight
8
7
Unit price (Field 5)

6
Numeric code
08= Unit price
7
Number of digits for unit price
04= four digits for unit price
8
Department no. (Field 6)

6
Numeric code
12= Department number
7
Number of digits for department number
03= three digits for department number
8
Check and adopt code

Confirm submenu 04
confirm
7 - 30
Pr210
03
02040
6
Pr210
03
08040
6
Pr210
03
12030
6
Pr210
04
C 115 L19 H-
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Code 128
Assign barcode
e.g. in Pr 110/PLU no./ 05
12
Code digit for barcode type

0= Instore code
13
Barcode no e.g. 10
The structure of Code 128 in Pr 210 is saved
under this number.
15
Part string in example not used. Therefore

the remaining digits are without meaning.
Input: 0000000000
16
Scale check digit
12
Pr110
05
13
15
0 10 0000000000
7
1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 73: Example of Code 128 with 6 fields
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 31
Programming
7.9
Traceability marker
Traceability text
Information about the origin of a product e.g. beef is is entered into
Pr 110/PLU number (9900 to 9999)/ 10.
The PLU number 9900 equals traceability number 00. PLU number 9902 equals origin
number 02 etc.
The traceability text is saved under the manufacturer number, which is printed in addition
to the PLU text.
1
Traceability text
2
7
PLU text
2
1
Fig. 74: Traceability text

Traceability no.
The traceability number is allocated to a product in during the sale.
There are 2 types of allocation:
1.
2.
Manual input of traceability number when a PLU is called up.

Automatic traceability no.
Program traceability data for manual input

-
Create text of origin

Pr110/PLU number (9900- 9999)/ 10
Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-1999)/ 09 -1

1= with data of origin
Setting traceability marker

Pr 515/03 -1
1= manual traceability marker,
Program traceability data for automatic traceability number

-
Create text of origin

Pr110/PLU number (9901-9999)/ 10
Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-9999)/ 09 -1

Setting traceability marker

Pr 515/03 -2
2= automatic traceability marker,
Define automatic traceability no.

PR515/04 -01
(01-99)
7 - 32
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
By-Count
7.10
Overview of By Count article definition
By Count articles are piece goods in a package. The number of pieces per package is
defined.
By Count and fixed weight database configuration

The By Count article type must be started up with Pr 606.
_______________________________________________________________________
All article data are deleted during setting database
configuration.
7
Back up your data before database configuration.

_______________________________________________________________________
Menu setting
- Pr 606/ 07 -11xx
By Count and fixed weight on.
- Pr 606/ 08 - 81
Start database configuration
The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.
By Count piece goods

General settings
Menu setting
- Pr 515/ 08 -0
or
- Pr 515/ 07 -1
goods
6.111.98.5.01.18
Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.

Mandatory input number of pieces for all By Count piece
7 - 33
Programming
By-Count
Create By Count piece goods in a PLU
The selling price per package refers to the unit price and the set number of pieces per
package.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 07 -3
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99)
7

By Count piece good type
The price per piece is also to be printed. If back calculation is activated, the price per
piece is determined and additionally printed.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -0
Without back calculation
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -1
Wit back calculation The price per piece is
back-calculated from the package unit price and the number of pieces.
The number of pieces must always be entered for the called By Count article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0
Without mandatory input number of pieces
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -1
With mandatory input number of pieces
Overwriting the selling price must be permitted in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -1 With price overwriting
7 - 34
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Fixed weight
7.11
Create overview of fixed weight
The stored fixed weight for the article is used for the price calculation instead of the
weighed weight.
Fixed weight
General settings
Menu setting
- Pr 515/ 08 -0
or
- Pr 515/ 08 -1
Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.

Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles
7
Define fixed weight in a PLU
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -1
-
Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4

Pr 110/PLU no./17
Unit price input (price per fixed weight)

Unit price referring to 100g or 1/4 Lib
Type fixed weighed
The fixed weight should always be entered for the called product in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0
Without mandatory input Fixed weight
or
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight
Overwriting the unit price should be permitted in sales.
Menu setting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1
With price overwriting
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 35
Programming
7.12
Overview of By Count fixed weight
In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.
General settings
Menu setting
Mandatory input of fixed weight
- Pr 515/ 08 -0
Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.
or
- Pr 515/ 08 -1
Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles
7
-
Mandatory entry of quantity

Pr 515/ 08 -0
Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.
or
Pr 515/ 07 -1
Piece Mandatory input for all By Count articles
Define By Count fixed weight in a PLU

Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01
- Pr 110/ 08 -0
or
- Pr 110/ 08 -1
-

Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 Lib
Pr 110/ 07 -5
Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package
Pr 110/ 17
The fixed weight should always be entered for the called article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0
Without mandatory input Fixed weight
or
The number of pieces must always be entered for the called article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0
Without mandatory input number of pieces
or
Overwriting the package price must be permitted in sales.
Menu setting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1
With price overwriting
7 - 36
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
VAT
7.13
Overview VAT
VAT only for ticket and multi-user operation.

If you define the VAT on the scale, please proceed as follows:
1.
Switch on VAT in setting into operation, see page 7 - 145.

Pr606/ 07 -111
VAT on
Pr606/ 88 - 81
The values set are adopted.
Re-programming of paper and mode settings (Pr510) necessary.
2.
Print incl. VAT yes/no, see page 7 - 99.

Pr520/ 10 -1
Print
Pr520/ 10 -0
No print
3.
Create VAT rates 1 to 5, see page 7 - 72.

Pr230
VAT number 1-5
Pr230/ 01
Define VAT rate
Pr230/ 02
0= VAT incl.
1= VAT excl.
Pr230/ 03
VAT text
4.
A VAT number for all articles yes/no, see page 7 - 74.

Pr231/ 03
0= Use VAT from article
1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles
If a VAT number (1-5) is assigned to all articles, the VAT from article is ignored.
Overwriting is not possible.
5.
Assign VAT to articles, see page 7 - 51.

Pr110/ PLU-Nr./ 20
VAT number 1-5
Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 - 1
The VAT can be overwritten.
Pr215/ 09
VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles
Pr215/ 10
Pr215/ 11
6.111.98.5.01.18
7
7 - 37
Programming
VAT
7.13.1
Assign VAT to PLU
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07
- Pr 230
- Pr 231/ 03 -0
VAT is activated
The VAT rate is created
The VAT is used from PLU
Pr
Call up menu
Select menu
7
Pr110
000001
The PLU number is displayed.

confirm
Select submenu
Pr110
20
Confirm
Pr110
20
1
Enter VAT number
Pr110
20
2
Confirm
The VAT rate from the VAT number 2 has now been assigned to PLU1.
Submenu 21 is displayed.
Pr110
21
confirm
<1> press
Pr110
21
1
The VAT in PLU can now be overwritten with a different VAT, see page 6 - 29.
Exit menu
7 - 38
6.111.98.5.01.18
7.14
Programming
Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00)
Up to 6 devices can be connected in a scale network (system). Two scales can be

connected directly via the EDP connector. Several scales are connected with a switch.
For scales with a 30 kg weighing range, please ask your Bizerba consultant.
Continuous operation in system possible. With Continuous operation a ticket can be
transmitted to any scale and printed in multi-operator mode. Data maintenance is also
possible.
Process Continuous operation
Registration is done on a scale. Further registrations by the same operator can be done
on all scales within the system. With key <Total> and operator key, e. g. <OP1> the ticket
can be closed on any scale on the system. The items and the total are then printed.
The following must be observed during continuous operation:
Prerequisite
- All scales must run on the same program version (Pr 716 / 09).
- All scales must be equipped with a dot-seven display.
Menu setting
-
The Database configuration (Pr 606) must be set equally on all scales.
Each scale within the scale must have an own network IP address (Pr 600)
All scales need to have the same Multicast address (Pr 607/ 02).
All scales need to have the same port number
( Pr 607/ 03 ) ( Pr 607/ 04 ).
One scale must be set as master scale (Pr 607/ 01 - 9).
Only one scale must be set as master.
The other scales need to be set as slaves (Pr 607/ 01 - 1).
The operating mode must be set to multi-operator mode (510 /01 - 01).
_______________________________________________________________________
Scales in multi-operator and price labeling mode participate in
master data supply (Pr510 01). Continuous operation cannot be run
on scales in price labeling mode.
Continuous operation
multi-operator .
is
only
supported
in
operating
mode
Master data maintenance only possible on master scale.

Sales can only be viewed, printed and deleted on the master scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 39
7
Programming
System set-up
During system set-up, e.g. when switching on the scales, the slave scales show the
current system condition as scrolling message. The scales cannot be operated during this
time.
System conditions with slave scales
If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling
message on the display.
7
Scale Network off

Scale not entered in system yet.
Scale Update
Update of system data running.
If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master
data from master scale are stored.
_______________________________________________________________________
It is absolutely necessary that you wait until all scales have
been entered into the system.
If one of the above mentioned messages appear on the display of a
slave scale and sales is continued on the other scales at the same time,
synchronization of this slave scale is re-started, this means a scale
update is started again.
This functionality may cause that the respective slave scales can no
longer be integrated in the system network.
_______________________________________________________________________
System identification
If a device has been entered into the system,
the arrow 1 flashes in the display .
0,000
Arrow flashes = Slave scale in system.
Arrow flashes every second= master scale in system.
0,00
0,00
Arrow is dark = stand-alone scale.
7 - 40
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Take scale out of a system

A scale in the system is to run as a single scale.
+
Press<Ctrl> and hold pressed,

then press <Up arrow>.
WAIT appears on the display
and the scale starts booting.
0,000
0,00
0,00
_______________________________________________________________________
7
Sales data and ticket memory are deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________
The scale can be operated as stand-alone scale.
If the scale is to be integrated in the system again, switch on and off scale again.
The sales data and the ticket memory are cleared and overwritten with the system network
data.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 41
Programming
Article maintenance 1--
7.15
Article maintenance menu Pr 1--
Define, edit or delete article (PLU).

Up to 6000 products (PLU) can be defined.
_______________________________________________________________________
The number of products (PLU) depends on the settings in memory
management Pr 606. Standard setting is 2000 PLU.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
7
Define PLU
Pr 110
Print article (PLU) lists
Pr 115
Delete article individually
Pr 120
Delete article from to
Pr 121
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 42
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Article maintenance Pr 1--
7.15.1
Defining PLU (article)
....................................................
Pr 110
All data related to an article is saved in the PLU no., e.g. text, basic price, tare, etc.
Select 110
Pr110
confirm
PLU product
The menu text is displayed
7
confirm
Index
_____9
Enter PLU number (1 to 6000)

confirm
Scroll in submenu using arrow

keys.
Price
01
confirm
Pr 110 Submenu overview:
01= Unit price
02= Product group
03= Tare
04= Shelf-life days
05= Barcode
06= Price overwriting
07= Article type
08= Weight class
09= Data of origin
10= PLU article text
11= Supplementary text 1 - 4
12= Supplementary text 1 - 10 for BLD text fields
13= Logo print in BLD logo fields 1-3
14= Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes
15= Unit price back calculation for the By Count operating modes
16= Mandatory input of pieces
17= Fixed weight
18= Fixed weight mode
19= Mandatory input of fixed weight
20= VAT number
21= VAT can be overwritten
22= Tare % (percentage tare)
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 43
Programming
Unit price input

_______________________________________________________________________
The price/kg depends on the entered unit price (110/PLU no./01)
and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08).
_______________________________________________________________________
Example:
Weight class
1kg
100g
Unit price input

25.80
25.80
Price/kg
25.80
258.00
7
Submenu
01
Enter unit price
Pr110
01
0025,80
save
Product group
Submenu
02
Enter product group
Pr110
02
0001
0000-9999 product groups are possible.

save
Tare
Submenu
03
Enter tare in gram
Pr110
03
0,002
save
_______________________________________________________________________
Article tare is country-dependent.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 44
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Sell-by date
The sell-by date is only printed on labels.
If entry is smaller than 900 (< 900), the text best before is printed on the label.
With entry 900 the text use by instead of best before is printed,
e.g. for minced meat the packaged on date and the use-by date would then be the same.
With an input of 901, the use-by date is 1 day later than the packaged on date, etc..
The shelf life days are added to the packaged on date. The resulting sell-by date is
printed. If 000 is entered, no sell-by date is printed.
Submenu 04
Pr110
04
900
Enter shelf-life
7
Shelf-life t 900 = Print sell-by date

Shelf-life y 900 = Print use-by date
save
Barcode for article

Prerequisite
for printing the barcode, see page 7 - 16
Submenu
05
Enter 13 digits for barcode

save
1
2
3
0= Instore code (EAN 13, EAN 8 or code 128)

Pr110
05
0010815000000
1
Substring (free entry) is defined in Pr 210/

03
The in-store code must be filled with
000000.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 45
Programming
Overwriting the price

The stored unit price for an article can be changed in sales (overwritten), see page 6 - 17.
Submenu 06
Pr110
06
Enter selection
0= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted

1= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted
save
7
Article type
Submenu
07
Enter article type
Pr110
07
0
save
Product types
0= weighed - The selling price of an article is calculated from the weight.
1= non weighed - The price does not depend on the weight. The selling price of the article
is the entered unit price.
2= minus - The unit price of the article is a minus amount in sales, e.g. for
deposit on bottles.
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07 -11
or
- Pr 606/ 07 -10
or
- Pr 606/ 07 -01
-
Allow By Count and fixed weight

Allow By Count only
Allow fixed weight only
Pr 606/ 08 -81
Start commissioning
The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.
_______________________________________________________________________
All article data are deleted during commissioning.
Back up your data before commissioning.
_______________________________________________________________________
3= By Count - the price relates to pieces per package.
4 = Fixed weight
5=By Count fixed weight - fixed weight and price relate to pieces per package
7 - 46
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Weight class
_______________________________________________________________________
The price/kg depends on the entered unit price (110/PLU no./01)
and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08).
_______________________________________________________________________
Submenu
08
Pr110
08
0
Enter weight class
0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb depending on country option

1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb depending on country option
7
save
Data of origin
Data of origin can be allocated to a PLU no.
Prerequisite
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 10
The data, e.g. birth, slaughter, cutting, etc. has to be defined, PLU no. 9900 - 9999,
see page 7 - 32.
Submenu
09
Pr110
09
0
Enter selection
0= without data of origin
save
PLU article text

Submenu
10
Pr110
10
C 500 LI H-
Enter article text

Example:
S
20
19
27
19
34
17
Enter PLU article text, see also page7 - 10.
Start test print

salami is printed
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 47
Programming
Supplementary text 1-4

Prerequisite
Ticket
- Pr 550/ 13 -1
-
Release print of supplementary texts.
Label
Pr 555/ 16 -______1
Release print of supplementary texts.
1 to 4 supplementary texts can be printed in addition to the PLU article text.

The supplementary texts have to be available in Pr 200.
7
Submenu
11
Pr110
11
_-_________
Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4
Pr110
11
1-000000000
confirm
Pr110
11
1-_________
Enter text number

from Pr 200
Pr110
11
1-______ 101
confirm
Supplementary text 1-10 for BLD text fields

BLD= Bizerba Label Designer
Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.
In the design of labels in BLD, different text fields can be defined.
A text from Pr 200 can allocated to these text fields in the scales.
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 01 -00
Label layout from BLD.
- Pr 555/02 -09
select BLD label number
- Pr 606/ 03 -0 to 10 Release BLD text fields
Submenu
12
Enter text feld number

1-10
confirm
Enter text number from Pr200
Pr110
12
__-_________
Pr110
12
01-000000000
Pr110
12
01- 000000101
confirm
The text no. 101 in Pr 200 is allocated to text field 1.
7 - 48
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Logo print in BLD logo fields

Graphic fields can be defined in BLD for label design.
A logo can be allocated to these graphic fields in the scales.
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 01 -00
- Pr 555/ 02 -01....
- Pr 606/ 04 -0 to 3
Submenu
Label layout from BLD.

Select BLD label.
Release BLD logo fields
Pr110
13
_-____
13
7
Pr110
13
1-____
Enter logo field number

1-3
confirm
Pr110
13
1-___ 7
Enter logo ID
confirm
In logo field 1, the logo with ID 0007 is being printed.
By Count: Pieces per package

Submenu
14
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-no../ 07 -3
Article type By Count
Enter number of pieces

00-99 pieces per package are possible.
Pr110
14
12
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 49
Programming
Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight

Submenu
15
Enter selection
Pr110
15
1
0= Without back calculation

1= With back calculation
The unit price per piece or the fixed weight per kg is calculated.
save
7
By-Count: Mandatory input of pieces

Submenu
16
Enter selection
Pr110
16
0= No mandatory input
1= with mandatory input
save
The number of pieces per package must always be entered in the sale.
By-Count: Fixed weight

Submenu
17
Enter fixed weight for a package
Pr110
17
000560
000000 - 999999
save
By-Count: Fixed weight mode

Submenu
18
Enter mode
Pr110
18
0= Standard
1= lboz (g)
2= oz (lboz)
3= oz (g)
4= oz (lb)
save
A second representation of the unit is printed in brackets.
7 - 50
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming

Submenu
19
Pr110
19
Enter selection
0= No mandatory input
save
The fixed weight must always be entered in sales.
7
VAT number
Submenu
20
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07
- Pr 230
- Pr 231/ 03 -0
VAT is activated
VAT rate has been defined
VAT rate as of PLU is used
Enter VAT number
Pr110
20
1-5 = VAT number
save
The selling price of the selected PLU is calculated with the entered VAT.
Overwriteable VAT
also see page 6 - 29
Submenu 21
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07
- Pr 230
- Pr 630
- Pr631/ 03
VAT is activated
VAT rate has been defined
A VAT key has been created
reprogrammed keyboard is set
Enter selection
0= VAT cannot be overwritten
Pr110
21
1= VAT can be overwritten

save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 51
Programming
Tare % (dependent on country)

If tare % is entered, the tare value increases in parallel to total weight in percent. If e.g. a
PLU tare is entered, it is added to percent tare. The total tare is deducted from total
weight. Only the net weight is caluclated.
Example: An article has a PLU tare of 2 grams and a percent tare of 10%.
If the article has a weight of 1000 grams the 2g PLU tare + 10% percent tare are
deducted. The display shows the tare weight of 102 g and the net weight of 898g.
If the same article has a weight of 1500g the display shows a tare weight of 152g and a
net weight of 1348g.
7
Submenu
22
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07
Permit tare %
Enter the tare % for the PLU

save
7 - 52
Pr110
22
000,00
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.15.2
Print PLU (article) lists
....................................................
Pr115
Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 5.

Print all PLUs
Pr115
Select 115
Print PLU list
The menu text is displayed.
confirm
7
Print PLU list

01
Scroll in submenu using arrow keys.
confirm
Print PLU list

01
000001-999999
confirm
All programmed PLUs are printed.
Printing PLU selection
Submenu 01 and 02
Enter submenu
01= Print PLU selection with all article lines
02= Print PLU selection with first article line only
confirm
Enter start PLU no.
Confirm start PLU
Enter first PLU no.
Pr115
01
Pr115
01
000001-999999
Pr115
01
_____1-999999
Pr115
01
000001-______
Pr115
01
000001-____ 12
Confirm the end PLU no. and start printing

PLU 1 to 12 are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 53
Programming
7.15.3
Deleting PLU (article) individually
...................................
Pr 120
Select 120
confirm
Pr120
000015
Enter article (PLU) number

confirm
PLU 15 is deleted.
7
7.15.4
Deleting PLU (article) from - to
......................................
Pr 121
Select 121
confirm
Pr121
_____1-000000
Enter start PLU no.

Pr121
000001-______
confirm
Pr121
Enter first PLU no.
000001-____ 10
delete
PLU 1 to 10 are deleted.
7 - 54
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
7.16
Data management Menu Pr 2--
Define supplementary texts and allocate them to a text number.

Define barcode structure.
Make non-PLU settings. Non-PLU are products that are not stored in the scales.
_______________________________________________________________________
Creating supplementary texts
Pr 200
Create header and footer texts
Pr 201
Create scrolling message
Pr 202
Print texts
Pr 205
Delete texts
Pr 206
Define barcode structure
Pr 210
Print barcode structure
Pr 211
Non-PLU settings
Pr 215
BLD label list / print logo list
Pr 220
Delete BLD labels / logos
Pr 225
Define VAT
Pr 230
Manage VAT
Pr 231
_______________________________________________________________________
7.16.1
Creating supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200
An arbitrary text is created and stored in Pr 200. Each text is given a text number. This text
number can, for example, be allocated to a PLU product.
500 text numbers may be defined.
Example: A supplementary text is saved in Pr 200 as text number 10.
This number is entered in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 11 so that this text will be printed in addition to
the PLU article text.
Select 200
confirm
Index
_______10
Enter text number

confirm
Enter text
Pr200
C 1500 LI
H-
see page 7 - 10
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 55
7
Programming
Data management Pr 2--
7.16.2
Creating header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201
In Pr 201 header and footer notes are created centrally. Each header and footer text is
saved under a text number.
A header or footer text is printed when one of these text numbers are entered at:
Ticket in Pr 550/ 04 and 05.
-
Labels in Pr 555/ 09.
Select 201
7
confirm
Index
10
Enter text number

1 - 99
confirm
Enter header or footer text
see page 7 - 10
I
C 500 LI H-
confirm
7 - 56
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
7.16.3
Defining scrolling message text
......................................
Pr 202
Select 202
confirm
Pr202
10
Enter text number

01 - 99
confirm
7
Enter scrolling message text

Text input, see page 7 - 10
C 500 LI H-
confirm
The output can be changed with control characters:
&Z;= Display character-by-character
-
&W;= Display word-by-word (standard)
&Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)
&Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)
Control characters can be entered in the text at will. The control character influences the
subsequent text. Always place a < ; > after the control character.
_______________________________________________________________________
Scrolling message settings for the scale in Pr 516.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 57
Programming
7.16.4
Printing texts
....................................................................
Pr 205
Requirement
- Receipt paper is in the printer
- Pr 510/ 04 -0
Ticket paper type is set.
Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 6.
Select 205
7
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr205
01
01= Print supplementary texts

02= Print header and footer texts
03= Print scrolling message
confirm
Pr205
01
0
Start printing
The stored texts are printed.
7 - 58
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
7.16.5
Deleting supplementary texts and header/footer texts . . . Pr 206
Select 206
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr206
01
01= Delete supplementary text from Pr 200 individually.

02= Delete all supplementary texts from Pr 200.
03= Delete single header and footer text from Pr 201.
04= Delete single scrolling message text from Pr 202.
7
confirm
Deleting supplementary text individually

Submenu
01

1-999999999
Pr206
01
______101
confirm
The text with text number 101 is deleted.
Deleting all supplementary texts

Submenu
Enter 90
02
Pr206
02
90
confirm
All supplementary texts in Pr 200 are deleted.
Deleting header and footer texts

Submenu
03

confirm
Pr206
03
_2 - 00
Pr206
03
02 - 15
confirm
Header and footer text with the text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 59
Programming
Deleting scrolling message texts

Submenu
01-99
04

confirm
Pr206
04
_2 - 00
Pr206
04
02 - 15
confirm
Scrolling message texts with text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.
7
7 - 60
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
7.16.6
Defining barcode structure
..............................................
Pr 210
In Pr 210 the structure of the instore code EAN 13 and the code structure for code 128 is
created.
_______________________________________________________________________
Examples for
- Barcode structure code 128 see pge 7 - 26
- Barcode structure instore code EAN 13 see page 7 - 20.
_______________________________________________________________________
7
Structure for code 128, EAN 13 and EAN 8

Select 210
Confirm
Submenu
01= Define barcode format
02= Enter code constant
03= Select numeric code
04= Check code structure and save
Entering a structure number
Pr210
01 - 99
1
Structure number e.g. 02
02
Pr206
01
Confirm structure number

Confirm submenu
Defining barcode format
Pr210
01
Submenu 01
2
Barcode types
0= EAN13
1= Code 128
2= EAN 8
3
Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from Pr
550/02 or Pr 555/07.
05 to 22 = Barcode height in mm
4
OCR line
0= OCR line is printed
1= OCR line is not printed
5
Module width 2 or 3 pixel
10002
2
confirm
Fig. 75: Example with OCR line
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 61
Programming
Entering a code constant

Submenu
02
I
02
C 20 LI HText and numeric input of up to 20 characters is possible for Code 128.
Text input see page 7 - 10
For EAN 13 and EAN 8, only numbers with up to 12 digits are possible.
confirm
confirm
7
Selecting numeric codes
Submenu
03
confirm
1
Pr210
03
01050
Encoded values
1
2
3
01= price
02= Weight
03= No. of pcs.
04= Foreign currency
05= Part string from PLU Starts at 4th position after code structure number.
06=PLU number
07= Middle check digit Enter 07000
Only for EAN 13. Middle check digit possible in pos. 6, 7 or 8.
08= Unit price
09= Foreign currency unit price
10= Tare
11= Device number, see Pr 605
12= Department number, see Pr 604
13= Operator no.
14= Scale number, see Pr 603
15= 313 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128
16= 131 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128
17= Encode ticket number
Number of digits
01 to 10 digits
7 - 62
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--

1=Decimal places are cut off No rounding occurs.
2= There is a cutoff after the first decimal place. No rounding.
3= After the second decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.
4= After the third decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.
5= Floating comma only for EAN 13.
The code digit (e.g. 22 for price) is increased by the number of omitted digits. The
increased code digit means that during scanning of the barcode the number of
digits and position of the comma are established.
6= The value to be coded is multiplied by 10.
7= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 10.
Brief example: Define code structures for EAN Code 13 (12 position necessary)
Pr 210
05
Define structure number, e.g. 05
Pr 210/ 01
00002
(EAN 13 with OCR)
Pr 210/ 02
21
Constant, e.g. 21 (2 positions)
Pr 210/ 03
Pr 210/ 03
Pr 210/ 03
06040
07000
02050
PLU number (4 positions)

Middle check digit (1 position)
Weight with 5 positions
Pr 210/ 04
<enter>
Constant
2 digits
PLU number
Middle check digit, 1 position
Weight
Automatic check digit from scale
4-digits
5 digits
Fig. 76: Example barcode
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 63
7
Programming
Checking and adopting code structure

Submenu
04
confirm
Pr210
04
C 337 LI H-
Checking code structure by printing out
7
<Press> shift and hold,

then<press> total
The entered code is printed.
Fig. 77: Print code structure
Checking code structure in display
Decimals as configured
04
C 337 L8 H-
<Press scrolling.
The entered code is displayed line by line
confirm
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code
structure must be re-entered from the beginning.
7 - 64
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
7.16.7
Administering barcode structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211
Select 211
confirm
Pr211
01
Enter submenu
confirm
Submenu overview:
7
01= Print code structures

02= Delete code structures
03= Code structure number for all PLU
04= Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position
05= Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position
Printing code structures

Submenu 01
Pr211
01
confirm
The saved barcode structures are printed

1
Structure number
Barcode format
Field 1 code constant
4
5
Content field 1
Field 2 part string from PLU
Field 3 price
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
Fig. 78: Barcode structures

Deleting code structures
Submenu 02
Enter first code number e.g. 1
confirm
Enter code number., e.g. 10.
Pr211
02
_1-00
Pr211
02
01- 10
confirm
Code numbers 1 to 10 are deleted.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 65
Programming
Data management Pr 2-Code structure number for all PLUs

Submenu 03
The same barcode structure is assigned to all PLUs.
Enter code number
Pr211
03
11
00= Use code structure number from PLU Pr

110/ 05
01-99 = Code structure number is used for all
PLUs.
7
confirm
All products (PLU) are printed out with barcode structure no. 11.
The barcode structure is set in Pr 210.
Module width
Bars and spaces of a barcode have a standard pixel width. The readability of a rotated
barcode can be improved by using a larger pixel width.
Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position
Submenu 04
Generally allocate module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position.
Enter module width
Pr211
04
0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).

2, 3= Generally use this module width. Ignore module width from code structure.
confirm
Submenu 05
Generally allocate module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position.
Enter module width
Pr211
05
0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).

2, 3= Generally use this module width. Ignore module width from code structure.
confirm
7 - 66
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
7.16.8
Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215
Select 215
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr215
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
7
01= Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

02= Barcode for non-PLU weighed articles
03= Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (sold by piece)
04= Barcode for non-PLU minus article
05= Barcode for total
06= Product group for non-PLU weighed
07= Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (sold by piece)
08= Barcode for non-PLU minus articles
09= VAT for non-PLU weighed
10= VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (sold by piece)
04= VAT for non-PLU minus articles
04= PLU number for non-PLU articles
Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

Submenu
01
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 05 -01 or 11 Release print of sell-by date on label.
_______________________________________________________________________
Date representation depends on the setting in Pr 500/04.
_______________________________________________________________________
Enter date
Pr215
01
190508
e.g. 26.04.2007
If 1000000 is entered, no date is printed.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 67
Programming
Data management Pr 2-Prerequisite

For ticket
- Pr 550/ 01
For labels
- Pr 555/ 06
Release print of barcode

Release print of barcode
Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles

Submenu 02
Enter 13 digits for the barcode
7
Pr215
02
0000000000000
save
Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece)

Submenu
03
Pr215
03
0000000000000
save
Barcode for non-PLU minus article

Submenu
04
Pr215
04
0000000000000
save
Barcode for total

Submenu
05
Pr215
05
0020000000000
1
save
1
2
3
0= Instore code (EAN 13, EAN 8 or code 128)

Substring (free entry)
The number of digits is dependent on the number of digits for the substring. The
number is defined in Pr 210/ 03.
The in-store code must be filled with
000000.
7 - 68
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
Product groups for non-PLU weighed products

Submenu
06
Enter product group
Pr215
06
0000
0000-9999 Product groups are possible.

save
Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece)

Submenu
7
07
Enter product group
Pr215
07
0000

save
Product groups for non-PLU minus articles

Submenu
08
Enter product group
Pr215
08
0000

save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 69
Programming
VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles

Submenu
09
Enter VAT number
Pr215
09
1
1 - 5 VAT numbers are possible.

save
VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods)
7
Submenu
10
Enter VAT number
Pr215
10
1

save
VAT for Non-PLU minus articles

Submenu
11
Enter VAT number
Pr215
11
1

save
PLU number for non-PLU articles

Submenu 99
Articles without PLU number are allocated to a general number.
All articles that are sold using the <Non-weighed> or <Minus> key, or by entering a unit
price are booked under this number.
These numbers occur in the sales report and the ticket journal.
Non-PLU non-weighed article = number (e.g.: 999997)
Non-PLU minus article = number+1
(e.g.: 999998)
Non-PLU weighed = number+2
(e.g.: 999999)
Enter number range
Pr215
99
999997
000001 - 999997 PLU numbers are possible.

If these numbers are modified, the PLUs within the selected number range will be deleted.
save
7 - 70
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
7.16.9
Printing BLD label list / logo list
......................................
Pr 220
Select 220
confirm
Pr220
01
Enter submenu
confirm
Submenu overview:
7
01= Print BLD label list

02= Print logo list
Printing BLD label list

Submenu
01
Pr220
01
0
confirm
The list of BLD labels stored in the scale is printed.
Printing logo list

Submenu
02
Pr220
02
0
confirm
The list of BLD logos stored in the scale is printed.
7.16.10
Deleting BLD labels / logos
.............................................
Pr 225
Select 225
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr225
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Delete BLD labels
02= Delete BLD logos
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 71
Programming
Deleting BLD labels
Pr225
01
01-00
Submenu 01
Enter BLD label no.
confirm
Pr225
01
01- 03
Enter BLD label no.

confirm
The selected labels are deleted.
7
Deleting BLD logos
Pr225
02
0001-0000
Submenu 02
Enter BLD logo ID
confirm
Pr225
02
0001- 0003
Enter BLD logo ID

confirm
The selected BLD logos are being deleted.
Example, see page 7 - 8
7.16.11
Defining VAT
.....................................................................
Pr 230
Select 230
confirm
Pr230
1
Enter VAT number

1-5
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr230
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Define VAT rate
02= VAT inclusive or exclusive
03= VAT text
7 - 72
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data management 2--
Defining VAT rate

Submenu 01
Enter VAT rate in %, e.g. 19%
0-99
Pr230
01
19,00
confirm
VAT inclusive or exclusive

Submenu
02

0= VAT inclusive
1= VAT exclusive
7
Pr230
02
0
confirm
VAT text
Submenu
03
Enter text
19% inclusive
03
C20 LI
H-
confirm
The VAT rate is defined. Up to 5 different VAT rates can be defined.
Press
Esc
230
2
<ESC>
The next VAT number is displayed.
confirm
Pr230
01
The next VAT rate (no. 2) can be defined.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 73
Programming
7.16.12
Managing VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231
Select 231
confirm
Pr231
01
confirm
7
Submenu overview:
01= Print VAT data record list
02= Delete VAT number
03= General VAT
Printing VAT list

Submenu
01
confirm
Pr231
01
0
The list containing the defined VAT rates is printed.
Deleting VAT numbers

Submenu
02
Enter VAT number

1 to 5
confirm
Enter VAT number
1 to 5
Pr231
02
1-0
Pr231
02
1-3
confirm
The VAT number data records 1, 2 and 3 are deleted.
Same VAT for all articles

Submenu 03
Enter VAT number
Pr231
03
2
0= Use PLU and non-PLU VAT

1 - 5= Use same VAT for all articles
confirm
7 - 74
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
7.17
Reports menu Pr 3--
_______________________________________________________________________
Configure report layout
Pr 300
Printing reports on ticket
Pr 310
Printing report on label
Pr 311
Displaying / deleting sales
Pr 320
_______________________________________________________________________
7.17.1
Configuring report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300
Select 300
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr 300
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Printout of prices
02= Printout of PLU without sales
03= Printout of customer name for PLU report (Pr 310/ 02 and 03)
04= Printout of customer name for product group report (Pr 310/ 04)
05= Printout of customer name for operator report (Pr 310/ 05)
06= Printout of customer name for scale total sales (Pr 311/ 01) and operator total sales
report (Pr 310/ 05)
07= Printout of customer name for data of origin report (Pr 310/ 06 and 07)
08= Printout of customer name for VAT report (Pr 310/ 05)
Printout of prices
Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr 300
01
0
0= Prices are not printed

1= Prices are printed
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 75
7
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
Printout PLU without sales

Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr 300
02
0
0= PLUs without sales are not printed

1= PLUs without sales are printed
confirm
7
Customer name for reports

Submenu 03 to 08
New report names (customer names) are created in Pr 201.
Allocate text number of a name to report, e.g.
03.
Enter text number
Pr 300
03
01
01-99 Text number from Pr 201.

00 Print standard name.
confirm
7 - 76
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
7.17.2
Printing reports on ticket
.................................................
Pr 310
The reports can either be printed or printed and deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________
Observe report layout configuration Pr 300, see page 7 - 75.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 310
confirm
Enter submenu
7
Pr 310
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Scale report
02= PLU report with an article text line
03= PLU report with all article text lines
04= Product groups report
05= Operator report
06= Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that contains data of origin
07= Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that contain data of origin
08= VAT sales report
Scales report
Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr 310
01
0
0= Print report, no delete

1= Print and delete report
Start printing
Reports on PLU, operators, product groups and data of origin are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 77
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
PLU report with one article text line

Submenu
02
Pr310
02
0
Enter selection
Start printing
PLU report with one article text line is printed.
7
PLU report with all article text lines

Submenu
03
Pr310
03
0
Enter selection
Start printing
The PLU report is being printed with all article text lines.
1
Unit price
Sales of this PLU
Number of canceled reports +1

If the number is 9, no. 8 reports have been
canceled.
PLU unit price overwritten
4
5
Number of recordings
Sold quantity
Date and time of previous report
Product group
PLU number
10
PLU text
11
Date and time of current report
7 - 78
11
10
2
3
Fig. 79: PLU product report
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
Product group report

Submenu
04
Pr310
04
0
Start printing
The product group report is printed.
1
Sales for this product group
Number of recordings
Sold quantity
Product group number
7
4
3
Fig. 80: Product group report
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 79
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
Operator report
Submenu
05
Pr310
05
0
Enter selection
Start printing
The operator report is being printed.
7
Sales of operator 1
Sales of operator 2
Operator total sales
Number of canceled reports +1

The operator report documents how often
scale sales have been deleted before the
current report.
If the number is 10, no. 9 reports have
been canceled.
Date and time of last report canceled
Operator no.
4
5
Fig. 81: Operator report
7 - 80
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that contains data
of origin
Submenu
06
Pr310
06
0
Enter selection
Start printing
The sales by data of origin report is printed providing one text line that contains
data of origin.
Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that contain data of
origin
Submenu
07
Pr310
07
0
Enter selection
Start printing
The sales by data of origin is printed providing all text line that contain data of
origin.
In the sales by data of origin report, the data of origin is printed with the number of sold
items and sold weight.
1
Number of sold items
2
sold weight
Text of origin
Data of origin no.
Fig. 82: Sales by data of origin report
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 81
7
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
VAT sales report

Submenu
08
Pr310
08
0
Enter selection
Start printing
7
The VAT sales report is printed.

VAT inclusive
VAT exclusive
VAT text
VAT rate
VAT number
Reporting period:
6
7
Date and time of previous report
Sales results obtained within the period

between the current report and the previous
report.
Fig.: 83: VAT sales report
7.17.3
Printing report on label
Select 311
...................................................
Pr 311
Pr311
0
Start printing
The scale total sales are printed.
Scale number
Total sales of scale
Number of sales deletions
Fig. 84: Total sales report

7 - 82
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Reports Pr 3--
7.17.4
Displaying / deleting sales
..............................................
Pr 320
Select 320
confirm
Pr320
01
Enter submenu
01= Display total sales of scale
02= Delete sales
7
confirm
Displaying sales
Submenu
01
Pr320
01
confirm
364,15
The scale total sales are displayed.
Deleting sales
Submenu 02
_______________________________________________________________________
The scale total sales are completely deleted!
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr320
02
90
Enter 90
confirm
The scale total sales are deleted.
The deletion is booked, see page 7 - 82.
Delete journal
Submenu 99
_______________________________________________________________________
Deleting ticket journal from device!
_______________________________________________________________________
Enter 90
Pr320
99
90
confirm
Deleting ticket journal from device
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 83
Programming
Configuration Pr 5--
7.18
Configuration menu Pr 5--
_______________________________________________________________________
7
Setting date and time
Pr 500
Pr 510
Setting switching operating mode
Pr 511
Settings for different operating modes
Pr 515
Scrolling message settings
Pr 516
Settings for multi-operator mode
Pr 520
Settings for quick-operator mode
Pr 521
Settings for price labeling mode
Pr 525
Configuring operator keys with operator no.
Pr 530
PLU input mode and range limitation
Pr 535
Printing out PLU direct keys
Pr 536
Tare fixed value memory
Pr 540
Rounding and price calculating settings
Pr 545
Designing ticket and releasing barcode print
Pr 550
Designing labels and releasing barcode print
Pr 555
Labels configuration management
Pr 556
Foreign currency settings
Pr 560
Ticket call-up data volume
Pr 570
_______________________________________________________________________
7.18.1
Setting date and time
.......................................................
Pr500
Select 500
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr500
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Setting date
02= Setting time
03= Print year number either 2 or 4-digit
04= Date presentation
7 - 84
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Setting date
Submenu
01
Enter date
Input DDMMYY
The sequence is dependent on the setting in submenu 04
Pr500
01
190508
save
Setting time
Submenu
02
Enter time
Input hhmm
7
Pr500
02
0908
save
Printing year either 2 or 4-digital

Submenu
03
Enter selection
Pr500
03
0
0= Year with 2 digits

save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 85
Programming
Date representation
Submenu
04
Enter selection
Pr500
04
00
save
7
Input in
Pr 500/ 01
Print
Example
00
Day-Month-Y ear numeric
DDMMYY
21.07.06
01
Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric
DDMMYY
21July 06
02
DDMM
21July
03
Month year alphanumeric
MMYYDD
July 06
04
Month-Day-Y ear American numeric
MMDDYY
07.21.06
05
Month-Day-Y ear American alphanumeric
MMDDYY
July 21.06
06
Year-Month-Day Hungarian numeric
YYMMDD
06.07.21
07
Year-Month-Day Hungarian alphanumeric
YYMMDD
06July 21
08
Day-Month-Y ear numeric
DDMMYY
21-07-06
09
DDMMYY
21-July-06
7 - 86
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.18.2
Pr510
2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.

The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.
Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination
<Shift>+ <ESC>.
Select 510
confirm
Enter submenu
7
Pr510
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01 = Select main operating type
02= Select layout
03= Addition of customer total
04= Select paper type
Selecting main operating mode

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr510
01
01
save
01= Multi-operator mode
02= Self-service mode
03= Quick-service mode
04= Price labeling with manual triggering
05= Price labeling with automatic start
Selecting layout
Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr510
02
0
0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)

1= Label layout
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 87
Programming
Addition of customer total

Only effective on labels.
Example: A customer buys several articles. One label is created per article Afterwards a
total label is created
The total is printed if with addition has been set.
Submenu
03
Enter selection
7
Pr510
03
0
0= without addition of customer total.

1= with addition of customer total.
save
Select paper type

Submenu
04
Enter selection
Pr510
04
0
0= Ticket paper
1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer)
confirm
7 - 88
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.18.3
Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511
2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.

The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.
Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination
<Shift>+ <ESC>.
Select 511
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr511
01
7
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Select switching operating mode
02= Select layout
03= Addition of customer total
04= Select paper type
Selecting switching operating mode

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr511
01
02
save
Selecting layout
Only effective for operating modes that allow ticket and label
layout e.g. multi-operator mode.
Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr511
02
1

1= Label layout
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 89
Programming

Only effective on labels.
Submenu
03
Enter selection
Pr511
03
0
0= without addition of customer total.

1= with addition of customer total.
save
7
Select paper type

Submenu
04
Enter selection
Pr511
04
0
0= Ticket paper
confirm
7.18.4
...........................
Pr515
Select 515
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr515
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Automatic zerosetting.
02= Open tickets / labels
03= Origin labeling
04= Automatic data of origin number.
05= Negative customer total permitted or not permitted.
06= Determination of sales.
07= Mandatory input for By Count piece
08= Mandatory input for fixed weight
Automatic zero setting

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr515
01
0
0= Scale is reset (within the limits for automatic zerosetting).

1= Zerosetting error 115 is displayed, when the weight value is below zero.
2= Scale is not set to zero.
save
7 - 90
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Open tickets / labels

Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr515
02
0
0 = open tickets are printed.

After switching on the scales, open tickets are automatically printed.
1= open tickets are not printed and not deleted.
If open tickets exist after the scales have been switched on, they have to be finalized
(<Total> <OP>).
save
7
Origin labeling
Submenu 03
Enter selection
Pr515
03
0
0= Origin labeling off.

1= Enter data of origin number manually.
2 =Use defined data of origin number.
save
Defining data of origin number

Submenu
04
Enter selection
Pr515
04
35
00-99 = defined traceability no.

save
All articlse (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text
that is stored under the defined traceability number.
Negative customer total

Submenu
05
Enter selection
Pr515
05
1
0= Customer total cannot become negative.

1= Customer total can become negative.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 91
Programming
Sales calculation
To create the reports ( Pr310 and Pr 311), the sold items have to be added in the total
memory.
Submenu
06
Enter selection
Pr515
06
1
0= Sold items are not added to the total memories.

1 = Sold items are added to the total memories.
save
7
Mandatory input for By Count pieces
Submenu
07
Enter selection
Pr515
07
1
0= Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/16

1= Mandatory input for By Count piece
save
Mandatory input for fixed weight

Submenu
08
Enter selection
Pr515
08
1
0= Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/19

1= Mandatory input for fixed weight and By Count fixed weight
save
7 - 92
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.18.5
Scrolling message settings
............................................
Pr 516
Select 516
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr516
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Select scrolling message no. from Pr 202
02= Select display location
03= Activate scrolling message
04 = Test scrolling message
7
Selecting scrolling message no.

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr516
01
00
00= Scrolling message not active

00-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202
save
Selecting display location

Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr516
02
0
0= Scrolling message on customer side

1= Scrolling message on operator side
2= Scrolling message on both sides
save
Activating scrolling message

Submenu
03
Enter selection
Pr516
03
0
0 = Scrolling message starts even with open operator accounts.

1= Scrolling message only starts when the scale is not being operated.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 93
Programming
Testing scrolling message

Submenu
04
Pr516
04
1
confirm
The scrolling message is displayed with
control characters
&Zscrolling message
04
- - - - -
7
7.18.6
Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520
_______________________________________________________________________
To enable the settings in Pr 520 to be applied, the multi-operator
operating mode has to be set.
Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 520
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr520
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Constant key function
02= Print article and total label
03= Items operator display mode
04= Cash register functions
05= Amount tend./change operation
06= Talon printout
07= Repeat ticket
08= Open ticket again
09= Print cancellation and canceled products
10= Print included VAT
11= Print ticket, as required

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr520
01
0
0= Fix unit price

1= Fix tare value
2= Fix unit price and tare value
save
7 - 94
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Printing article and total label

Prerequisite
- Pr 510/ 02 -1
or
- Pr 511/ 02 -1
Submenu
Label layout is set

Label layout is set
02
Pr520
02
0
Enter selection
1= Only print total label
2= Only print article label
7
save
The article label is printed when an article is registered.
The total label is printed when the <Total> and, e.g., <OP1> keys are pressed.
The article is registered but not printed when an operator key, e.g. <OP1>, is pressed.
The total label is printed when the <Total> and, e.g., <OP1> keys are pressed.
2= Only print article label
The article label is printed when an article is registered.
The total is displayed when the <Total> and, e.g., <OP1> keys are pressed.
_______________________________________________________________________
The number of items is printed on the total label.
The customer total () is only printed, if addition of customer total is set
in Pr510/03 -1 or Pr511/03 -1.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 95
Programming
Items operator display

Submenu
03
Enter selection
1
Display for sheet cancellation
2
Display after recording
Display for total/subtotal
Pr520
03
001
1
0= inactive
1= active
7
save
Example:
The operator number OP 1 and the
number of registered items Po 2
appear in the display.
Cash register functions

Submenu
04
Total
OP 1 Po 2
[1]
2,54
Pr520
04
0
Enter selection
0= Cash register does not open; registration is always permitted
1= Cash register opens after pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You can register when the cash register is open.
2= Cash register opens only after registration and
pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You can register when the cash register is open.
3= Cash register opens after pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You cannot register when the cash register is open.
4= Cash register opens only after registration and
pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You cannot register when the cash register is open.
save
7 - 96
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Amount tend./change operation

Prerequisite
- Pr 606/10 -1
Submenu
Ticket journal on
Pr520
05
0
05
Enter selection
0= without amount tend./change operation
1= Amount tend./change operation with a currency
2= Combined amount tend./change operation in local currency and foreign currency *
7
save
_______________________________________________________________________
If the amount paid in/out is to be printed, activate printout in Pr 550/
12 -1.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Recording with full ticket memory no longer possible. JournAl
appears in the display.
- Call-up and delete ticket journal via EDP interface, e.g.WinCWS.
Recording is permitted again.
_______________________________________________________________________
Talon printout
Submenu
06
Pr520
06
00
Enter selection
00= without talon
01-99 = with talon, the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 97
Programming
Repeating ticket
The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.
Submenu
07
Pr520
07
0
Enter selection
0= without repeat ticket
1= with repeat ticket
save
7
Opening ticket again
Submenu 08
Pr520
08
0
Enter selection
0= without ticket reopening
1= with ticket reopening
save
7 - 98
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Printing cancellation and canceled articles

Submenu 09
Enter selection
0= without printing cancellation and canceled articles
1= with printing cancellation and canceled articles
Pr520
09
0
save
Printing included VAT
7

Submenu 10
Enter selection
0= without printing included VAT
1= Printout of included VAT
Pr520
10
0
save
Ticket printout, as required.

Submenu 11
Enter selection
0= Ticket printout as required (<Shift> + <OP>)
1= Always print ticket
Pr520
11
0
save
_______________________________________________________________________
Customer ticket can be deactivated
The scale offers the option of suppressing printout of the customer
ticket.
According to EC directive 90/384/EC for Non-Automatic Weighing
Instruments, the customer is entitled to a receipt in order to check the
sales transactions in accordance with Appendix 1, No.14.
Suppression of the customer ticket should therefore only be activated
if you are sure that there is no customer requirement for printout of a
customer ticket.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 99
Programming
7.18.7
Settings for quick service mode
Pr 521
Description, see page 6 - 4

_______________________________________________________________________
To enable the settings in Pr 521 to be applied, the quick service
operating mode has to be set.
Pr 510/ 01 -03 Quick-service mode
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 521
7
confirm
Pr521
Enter selection
0= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, recording with the Operator key.
1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, automatic recording.
confirm
7 - 100
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.18.8
Settings for price labeling mode *
...................................
Pr525
_______________________________________________________________________
To ensure that the settings in Pr 525, it is absolutely necessary to set
the operating mode multi-operator mode.
Pr 510/ 01 -04Price labeling with release by hand
or
Pr 510/ 01 -05Price labeling with automatic start
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 525
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr525
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Labeling mode
02= Piece price multi- label printing
Labeling mode
Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr525
01
0
0= Price labeling
Label printing with sales price 0.00 is not supported.
Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.
Batch total label with number of items and batch price.
1= Weight labeling
Label printing with sales price 0.00 is supported.
Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.
Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *
2= Weight labeling only
Label printing with sales price 0.00 is supported.
If only the weight should be printed on the label, the unit price has to be 0.00.
Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *
save
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 101
7
Programming
Multiple label printing for price per piece

Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr525
02
00
00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay.
01 - 99= Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay.
save
7
7 - 102
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.18.9
Allocating operator no. to operator keys
Select 530
........................
Pr 530
Pr530
__ - ___
confirm
Enter key number (1-16)
Pr530
02 - 002
confirm
7
Pr530
02 - 020
Enter operator number (1-999)

save
7.18.10
PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535
Select 535
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr535
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input
02= PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.
03= PLU direct key mode
04= PLU direct key allocation
05= PLU range limitation
06= Delay time for PLU no. input
10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr535
01
0
0= Enter unit price via ten-key keypad.

Switch to PLU no. input by pressing the <Switch> key.
1= PLU no. input via ten-key keypad.
Switch to unit price input by pressing the <Switch> key.
2= It is possible to enter the PLU no. via the ten-key keypad, but not the unit price.
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 103
Programming
PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad

Submenu
02
Pr535
02
6
Enter selection
2= PLU no. input with 2 digits
7
confirm
PLU direct key mode

Submenu
03
Pr535
03
0
Enter selection
0= No range limitation: The PLU direct key no. corresponds to the PLU product number.
With range limitation:
The PLU direct key no. calls up the PLU article number
according to the range, see submenu 05.
1= PLU direct keypad is locked.
PLU call-up is only possible with the ten-key keypad.
2= The PLU direct key no. calls up the individually allocated PLU article numbers,
see submenu 04.
The range limitation only applies for PLU no. call-up via the ten-key keypad.
confirm
PLU direct key allocation

Prerequisite
- Pr 535/ 03 -2
PLU article no. is taken from the PLU direct key allocation.
An article (PLU no.) can be allocated to any PLU direct key.

Submenu
04
Enter PLU direct key no. (001-246)
Pr535
04
019 - 000019
confirm
Enter PLU article number (0-999999)
Pr535
04
019 - 000001
confirm
The PLU direct key is used to call-up the allocated PLU article number.
7 - 104
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
PLU range limitation

_______________________________________________________________________
The PLU range limitation does not affect the PLU direct keys where
the setting is Pr 535/03 -2.
_______________________________________________________________________
If only some of the articles stored in a scale are required, the articles can be limited for this
scale.
Example: There are 2000 articles stored in the scales.
Fruit articles from PLU 1 to PLU 100.
Cheese articles from PLU 101 to PLU 200.
Cold cut articles from PLU 201 to PLU 800 etc.
7
Only cheese is supposed to be sold at the cheese scale.

The articles in the cheese scale are limited to articles 101 to 200.
This means that the lowest range article number is allocated to PLU 1.
Submenu
05
Pr535
05
___101 - 999999
Enter the lowest PLU article no. in the range

confirm
Pr535
05
000101 - ___200
Enter the highest PLU article number in the

range
confirm
Article 101 is called up with PLU no. 1, and article 200 with PLU no. 100.
Calls outside of the range are rejected.
W/o range limitation
Article number = PLU-No
With range limitation

Article
PLU call-up
Article
PLU call-up
Fig. 85: PLU range limitation

6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 105
Programming
Delay time PLU no. input

If e.g. a 6-digit PLU no. input is expected, and only a 2-digit no. is input, the PLU is called
after the set delay time.
Submenu
06
Input time delaye.g.10
Pr535
06
10
00= The desired PLU is called with <Enter> or after entering all digits.
00-20 = The desired PLU is called after the set delay time.
7
confirm
The delay time value (01-20) is not specified in seconds.
1= small delay time;
20= large delay time.
7 - 106
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.18.11
Printing PLU direct keys
..................................................
Pr536
Overview of the allocation of articles (PLU number) to the PLU direct keys.
Select 536
confirm
Pr536
Start printing.
The PLU direct key list is printed.

Esc
7
Cancel print job.
PLU number
PLU direct key
Fig. 86: PLU direct keys
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 107
Programming
7.18.12
Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540
Select 540
Pr540
_ - ____
confirm
Enter the tare direct key (1-4)
Pr540
1 - 0000
confirm
7
Pr540
Enter assigned tare value
1 - 0002
confirm
7.18.13
Rounding and price calculation settings for

national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 545
The last 2 digits of the customer total and article total can be rounded.
If a related text is required, this can be released for printing in Pr 550/ 07. The text has to
be defined in Pr 200.
_______________________________________________________________________
Rounding and price calculation settings are specific to country.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 545
confirm
Pr545
01
Enter submenu
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Rounding of customer total
02= Rounding of article total
03= Rounding for By count
7 - 108
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Rounding methods for customer total *

Submenu
01
Pr545
01
0
Enter selection
confirm
0= no rounding
1= rounding down to 5
5= mathematical rounding to 5*

Submenu
7
02
Enter selection
Pr545
02
0
confirm
0= no rounding
Examples of rounding, see page 7 - 110.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 109
Programming
Configuration Pr 5-Examples of rounding

Setting
Explanation
No rounding
Rounding down to 5
The last digit is always 5 or 0.
Rounding down to 10
The last digit is always 0:
Rounding down to 50
The last digits are always 50 or 00.
Rounding down to 100
The last digits are always 00.
Mathematical rounding to 5
The last digit is always 5 or 0.
1
2
7
Example
3
4
The last digit is always 0:
The last digits are always 00, 25,50 or 75.
The last digits are always 50 or 00.

The last digits are always 00.
10.43 10.43
10.42 10.40
10.48 10.45
10.42 10.40
10.48 10.40
10.34 10.00
10.83 10.50
10.43 10.00
10.76 10.00
10.42 10.40
10.43 10.45
10.48 10.50
10.42 10.40
10.48 10.50
10.12 10.00
10.23 10.25
10.45 10.50
10.66 10.75
10.88 11.00
10.21 10.00
10.34 10.50
10.83 11.00
10.43 10.00
10.78 11.00
Rounding for By count

Submenu
03
Enter selection
0= mathematical
1= round up next position
Pr545
03
0
save
7 - 110
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.19
Ticket design overview
Information can be added, disabled or modified on the ticket.

1
Scale number
Pr 603 Enter scale number
1
17
16
2
3
4
Ticket counter
Pr 550/10 - 1 Ticket counter print
Operator number
7
8
Minus input,
Ticket total
10
11
14
key
4
5
Basic price
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 unit price
Selling price
Tare
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 PLU tare
Pr 550/ 03 Tare printout
Non-weighed, key <Non-weighed>
3
15
13
<Minus input>
Footer text
Pr 201 Enter footer text
Pr 550/ 05 Footer text printout
Barcode see page 7 - 16.
Pr 215/ 05 Totals barcode
Pr215/ 04 Barcode for non-PLU minus
Pr 110/ PLU number/ 05 PLU barcode
Pr 210/ Barcode structure for instore code
Pr 550/ 01 Barcode printout
Pr 550/ 02 Barcode height
12
11
10
Fig. 87: Ticket example

12
Item counter
13
PLU article text

Pr 110/PLU no./10
Enter PLU article text
Pr 550/ 8 Select font
Pr 550/ 9 Number of product text lines to be printed
14
Time
Pr 500/ 02
15
Date
Pr 500/ 01 Enter date
Pr 500/ 03 year number either 2- or 4-digit
Pr 500/ 04 Select date format
16
Department no.
Pr 604 Enter number
17
Header text
Pr 201 Create header text
Pr 550 / 04 Printout of header text
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 111
7
Programming
7.19.1
Creating ticket
.................................................................
Pr 550
Select 550
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr550
01
confirm
7
Submenu overview:
01= Print barcode on ticket
02= Barcode height in mm on ticket
03= Print tare on ticket
04= Print header text
05= Print footer text
06= Print foreign currency supplementary text
07= Print rounding supplementary text
08= Font change on ticket
09= Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket
10= Ticket counter printout
11= Print foreign currency *
12 = Print amount paid in/out
13= Print supplementary texts
14= Print header logo
15= Print footer logo
Printing barcode on ticket

Submenu
01
Enter selection
1
Article barcode
2
Totals barcode
Talon barcode
Pr550
01
000
1
0= Do not print barcode on ticket

1= Print barcode
save
Barcode height in mm on ticket

Submenu
02
Enter selection
5-22 mm
Pr550
02
17
confirm
7 - 112
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Printing tare on ticket

Submenu
03
Enter selection
Pr550
03
0
0= Do not print tare value on ticket

1= Print tare value, net weight is marked.
(country-specific character) Germany = N.
2= Print tare value, net weight is not marked.
confirm
7
Printing header text

Prerequisite
The header text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Requirement
The header text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Submenu
04
Enter selection
Pr550
04
01
00= no printout of header text

01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 56.
confirm
Printing footer text

Prerequisite
The footer text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Submenu
05
Enter selection
Pr550
05
02
00= no printout of footer text

01-99 = Footer text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 56.
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 113
Programming
Printing foreign currency supplementary text

Submenu
06
Pr550
06
000000000
Enter selection
000000000= No foreign currency supplement. text

1-999999999= Foreign currency supplement. text number see Pr 200
confirm
Printing rounding supplementary text
7
_______________________________________________________________________
The rounding supplementary text is only printed if rounding has taken
place.
_______________________________________________________________________
Submenu
07
Pr550
07
000000000
Enter selection
000000000= without rounding suppl. text

1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number, see Pr 200
confirm
Total
rounded total
Rounding text
1
3
2
Fig. 88: Example of rounding text
7 - 114
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Font change on tickets

Each article text was created with selected font. This PLU font is used for printing. (Text in
Pr 110/ PLU no./ 10).
A fixed and pre-set font can be defined for all printouts. This font has priority over the PLU
font.
Submenu
08
Enter selection
Pr550
08
000
000= Font from PLU

001-1 10= fixed font. The font set in the PLU is ignored.
7
confirm
Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket

Submenu
09
Enter selection
Pr550
09
0
0= all text lines are printed

1-9 = the corresponding number of lines are printed
10= text lines not printed
confirm
Ticket counter printout

Submenu
10
Enter selection
Pr550
10
1
0= Counter is not printed

1= Counter is printed
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 115
Programming
Printing foreign currency

Submenu
11
Pr550
11
0000
Enter selection
1
Print conversion rate
2
Print unit price, selling price and total
Print selling price and total
Only print total
0= No printout
1= Printout
7
save
Printing amount paid in/out

Prerequisite
- Pr 520/ 05 -1 or2
Amount paid in/out enabled.
Requirement
- Pr 520/ 05 -1 or2
Amount paid in/out enabled.
Submenu
12
Pr550
12
0
Enter selection
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
Printing supplementary texts

Prerequisite
- Pr 110/PLU no./11
Submenu
13
Enter selection
Assign supplement. text to article

Pr550
13
0
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
7 - 116
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Printing header logo

Submenu
14
Enter logo ID
Pr550
14
__12
0000= Do not print logo

0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID
confirm
Header and footer logos can be created with Bizerba Label Designer and loaded onto the
scale.
Logos present in the scale can be printed out, see page 7 - 8.
Printing footer logo

Submenu 14
Enter logo ID
Pr550
15
__12
0000= Do not print logo

confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 117
7
Programming
7.20
Label design - overview
Information can be added, disabled or modified on the label.

1
7
3
4
Label texts
Pr 555/ 16 Print release for standard or
alternative texts
Pr 555/ 20 and 21 Alternative texts
Sell-by date
Pr 555/ 05 Print
Pr 110/ PLU no./ 04 shelf-life days
Pr 215/ 01 Non-PLU shelf-life days
Net weight
Selling price
12
13
11
2
10
1
1
9
3
1
8
7
Fig. 89: Example of label 43 mm

5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
Basic price
Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 . . . . . . . . .
Print price frame
Pr 555/ 16
Packed-on date
Pr 555/ 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 500/ 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode
Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 . . . . . . . .
Pr 215/ 2; 3; 4; 5 . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator no.
Pr 555/ 17
PLU article text
Pr 110/ PLU-No/ 10 . . . . . . . . .
Pr 110/ PLU-No/11 . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logo printout
Pr 555/ 11
Header
Pr 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tare
Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 . . . . . . . . .
Pr 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pr 555/ 08 -1- . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 118
Enter PLU unit price
Release print
Enter date
Enter article barcode
Enter non-PLU barcode and total barcode
Release barcode print
Enter height of barcode
Enter article text

Assign supplem. text
Release print of supplementary texts
Create beginning of text field
Create beginning of data field
Set data field monitoring
Enter header text

Release print of header text
Enter PLU tare value
Enter tare value for the tare fixed value key
Release tare print
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
BLD labels
These labels are designed in BLD. The labels are issued with a number and are sent to
the scales and stored there.
_______________________________________________________________________
Release BLD text fields and logo fields during commissioning
(memory management) Pr 606/ 3 and 4, see page 7 - 144
_______________________________________________________________________
1
Logo field 1
Text field 1
7
1
Fig. 90: Example of label layout in BLD
Allocate text field content, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 12, on page 7 - 48.
Allocate logo field content, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 13, on page 7 - 49
1
Allocated logo in logo field 1
Allocated text in text field 1

1
Fig. 91: Example of BLD label in the

scales
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 119
Programming
7.20.1
Designing labels
..............................................................
Pr 555
Select 555
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr555
01
confirm
7
Submenu overview:
01= Label type
02= Select BLD labels
03= Label size
04= Change label distance
05= Packed-on and sell-by date on label
06= Barcode on label
07= Barcode height in mm on label
08= Tare printout on label
09= Print header text
10= Alternative text with sell-by date
11= Logo printout
12= Beginning of text field
13= Beginning of data field
14= Monitoring data field
15= Font change on label
16= Print price frame and texts on label
17= Print operator no., machine ID or check digit * on label
18= Print foreign currency
19= Rotate layout by 180 (for label paper only) and reverse operation
20= Alternative text with packed-on date
21= Alternative text with use-by date
22= Print units on the label
23= Print speed for label layout
7 - 120
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Label type
Submenu
01
Pr555
01
01
Enter selection
00= Label from BLD, see 555 / 02, only possible if BLD layouts are available.
Label type
01= Bizerba label standard
02= Bizerba label layout 1
Width
x height H
58mm x 43 mm
58mm x 43 mm
58mm x 43 mm
58mm x 43 mm
05= ISB with barcode

06= ISB w/o barcode 50mm x 48 mm
50mm x 48 mm
07= Narrow label with barcode

08= Narrow label w/o barcode
09= Narrow label w/o barcode
33mm x 47 mm
33mm x 47 mm
37mm x 36 mm
58mm x 38 mm
7
confirm
Example:
W Label width
H
Label height
W
Fig. 92:
Standard 01
Fig. 93:
Narrow label 07
6.111.98.5.01.18
Layout 02
Narrow label 08
7 - 121
Programming
Selecting BLD labels

Submenu
02
Enter selection
01... Select BLD label
Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01
Pr555
02
01
confirm
Label size
7
Submenu
03
Enter label height, e.g. 43mm

28-148 mm
Pr555
03
043-58
Pr555
03
043-__
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
Input of 54, 55 or 56 is rejected.
_______________________________________________________________________
Enter label width e.g. 58mm
10-58 mm
Pr555
03
043- 58
confirm
Changing label distance

Submenu
04
Enter distance
Pr555
04
16
8-40dot (8dot= 1mm)

confirm
Packed-on and sell-by date on label

Submenu
05
Enter selection
1
Packed-on date
Pr555
05
11
Sell-by date
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
7 - 122
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Barcode on label
Submenu
06
Pr555
06
11
Enter selection
1
Article barcode
2
Totals barcode
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
7
Barcode height in mm
Submenu
07
Pr555
07
15
Enter height of barcode

5-22 mm
Only effective for pre-defined labels.

Not effective with BLD labels.
confirm
1
2
3
3
Fig. 94: Barcode height

1
Beginning of text field
2
Beginning of data field
Barcode height
Tara printout on label

Submenu
08
Enter selection
Pr555
08
1
0= without tare printout

1 = with tare printout
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 123
Programming
Printing header text

Submenu
09
Pr555
09
01
Enter selection
00= Do not print header text
01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201
confirm
1
1
2
7
Header field
Logo
Header text
2
3
Fig. 95: Header field
Alternative text with sell-by date

Submenu
10
Enter selection
Pr555
10
000000010
000000000= No alternative text. Standard text is printed

1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200
confirm
Logo printout
Submenu
11
Enter logo ID
Pr555
11
0007
0000= without logo

0001= Logo Kesko
0002= Logo Tuko
0003= Logo Eko
0004= Logo Sokos A
0005= Logo Sokos B
0006= Logo C
0007= Logo Recycling
confirm
7 - 124
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming

Pr555
12
00
Submenu 12
Beginning of text field in mm
00= Text field 1 automatically starts 11 mm from top edge of label

11-84 = Beginning of text field in mm from top edge of label
confirm
Start of data field
7
Pr555
13
00
Submenu 13
Beginning of data field in mm
00= Data field is automatically positioned at the bottom edge of the label
11-84 = Beginning of data field 2 in mm from top edge of label
confirm
Example of label fields

1
2
Data field
1
2
Label height
3
4
Fig. 96: Label fields
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 125
Programming
Data field monitoring

Data field monitoring prevents the text field being pushed into the data field.
Pr555
Submenu 14
14
0
Enter selection
0 = no data field monitoring
1= Data field monitoring on
confirm
7
Example: 3 supplement. texts were assigned to article Calf's liver With setting Data
field monitoring on the supplementary texts are not printed, as print lies within data field.
1
2
5
5
3
Fig. 97: Data field monitoring on

1
Data field
Article and supplementary texts
7 - 126
no data field monitoring
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming

A font can be defined for all printouts. This font has priority over the PLU font.
Pr555
Submenu 15
15
001
Enter selection
000= Font from PLU
001-1 10= fixed font
confirm
7
Printing price frame and texts on label

Submenu
16
Print standard text, e.g. Tare
Print standard text e.g. Packaged or

alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/
20)
Print standard text e.g. best before or
alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 10
and Pr555/ 21)
Print standard text, e.g. Net or piece
Print standard text, e.g. Price
Print price frame
Print supplementary texts
Pr555
16
1111111
1
0= No printout
1= Printout
save
Printing operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label

Submenu 17
Enter selection
Pr555
17
0
0= without output
1 = with operator no.
(no. input in Pr 530)
2 =with machine ID (no. input in Pr 605)
3= with digit code *
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 127
Programming
Printing foreign currency

Submenu
18
Print conversion rate
Print unit price, selling price and total
Print selling price and total
Only print total
Pr555
18
1100
1
0= No printout
1= Printout
7
confirm
180 rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only)

Submenu 19
Enter selection
1
1= Print layout rotated by 180
2
1= Reverse label before printing
Pr555
19
11
1
0= No rotation and no reverse operation

1= Layout is printed rotated by 180; label is reversed before printing
180 rotation
For labels with pre-print turned by 180
Fig. 98: Example: No rotation
7 - 128
Example: Turned layout
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Reverse operation for standard labels

The header field height can differ on labels,
therefore the header text cannot be preprinted on the next label.
The label must be withdrawn to the label start before commencing printing (reverse
operation).
If a header text has been defined, this will be printed after reversing.
If no header text has been defined, the header text area can be used for the article text.
If the label has a header field height of 10 mm, reversing is not necessary.
Reversing in the case of BLD labels
During the creation of freely programmable labels with the PC program Bizerba Label
Designer, whether or not reverse operation is used for printing is defined.
The reversing function must be selected in the BLD project.
If reverse operation is selected, all fields, e.g. article or barcode, can be placed in the
header area. The layout is printed after reversing.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 129
7
Programming
Alternative text for packed-on date

Submenu
20
Enter text number
Pr555
20
000000010
000000000= No alternative text print

confirm
7
Alternative text for use-by date

Submenu
21
Enter text number
Pr555
21
000000000
000000000= No alternative text print

confirm
Printing units on the label

Submenu
22
Enter selection
1
Print price with unit
2
Print unit price with unit
Print weight with unit
Print tare with unit
Pr555
22
1111
1
0= No printout
1= Print unit
confirm
Printing speed for label layout

Submenu 23
The print quality can be improved if the print speed is reduced.
Enter selection
00= 44 mm/s
01= 53 mm/s (e.g. when used with batteries)
02= 66 mm/s
03= 88 mm/s
04= 102 mm/s (Standard)
05= 120 mm/s
Pr555
23
04
confirm
7 - 130
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.20.2
Labels configuration management
.................................
Pr 556
All label settings in Pr 555 can be stored in Pr 556/01.

Prerequisite
- The layout memory has to be deleted.
- Pr 556/ 03
Clear layout memory
Select 556
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr556
01
7
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Save configuration from Pr 555
02= Select label configuration
03= Delete label configuration
Saving configuration from Pr 555

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr556
01
1
1= Layout memory 1
2= Layout memory 2
3= Layout memory 3
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 131
Programming
Selecting label configuration

Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr556
02
0
0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing

1= Configuration from layout memory 1
confirm
7
Deleting label configuration
Delete from memory x to memory x
x = Layout memory 1-3
03
Pr556
03
1-1
Enter selection
Pr556
03
2-1
Submenu
confirm
Enter selection
Pr556
03
2-3
confirm
The label configuration in memories 2 and 3 is deleted.
7 - 132
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.20.3
...............................................
Pr 560
Select 560
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr560
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Select foreign currency function
02= Select foreign/ second currency display
03= Foreign currency calculating mode
04= Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout
05= Foreign currency symbol on label for price field
06= Decimal places of foreign currency
07= Foreign currency factor
08= Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)
09= Rounding of foreign currency
10= Foreign currency translation rules
7
Selecting foreign currency function

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr560
01
0
0= Euro/foreign currency off

1= Foreign currency function on
2= Euro function on (only possible for non-Euro devices)
confirm
Selecting foreign/ second currency display

Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr560
02
0
0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-functional)

1= Foreign currency display on
Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and
total in payment in/out mode
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 133
Programming
Foreign currency calculation method

Submenu
03
Enter selection
Pr560
03
0
0= Total calculated through conversion

1= Total calculated through addition of selling price
confirm
7
Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout

Submenu
04
Enter currency symbol
Pr560
04
C11
LI H-
See text input page 7 - 12

confirm
Foreign currency symbol on label for price field

Submenu
05
Enter currency symbol
Pr560
05
C11
LI H-
See text input page 7 - 12

confirm
Decimal places in foreign currency

Submenu
06
Enter selection
Pr560
06
2
0- 3= Decimal places in foreign currency

confirm
7 - 134
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Foreign currency factor

Submenu
07
Enter selection
Pr560
07
0
0= factor 1
1= factor 10
2= factor 100
3= factor 1000
4= factor 10000
confirm
7
Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)
Submenu
08
Enter selection
Pr560
08
0001,00
e.g. 0001.01
confirm
Rounding of foreign currency

Submenu
09
Enter selection
Pr560
09
0
0= no rounding
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 135
Programming
Foreign currency translation rules

Submenu
10
Pr560
10
0
Enter selection
0= Internal calculation in foreign currency

1= Internal calculation in national currency. The output amount is converted in foreign
currency.
confirm
7
7.20.4
Ticket call-up data volume
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/10 - 1
..............................................
Pr 570
Ticket journal on
Single items and totals are always transferred when calling up ticket journals via the host
interface. This menu is used to set additional data records.
Select 560
confirm
Enter selection
1
1= Transfer of total EAN code.
0= without
2
1= Transfer of Item EAN code.
0= without
3
1= Transfer of article text.
0= without
7 - 136
Pr570
111
1
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Commissioning Pr 6--
7.21
Commissioning menu Pr 6--
_______________________________________________________________________
TCP-IP settings
Pr 600
Display current IP address
Pr 601
Print out of communication settings
Pr 602
Setting scale number
Pr 603
Setting department number
Pr 604
Setting machine ID
Pr 605
Commissioning
Pr 606
Setting scale for system (continuous operation)
Pr 607
Control display lightning
Pr 610
Turn-of f time of scale
Pr 615
WLAN settings
Pr 621
Beeper on/off
Pr 622
Sensitivity of scale
Pr 625
Change key function
Pr 630
Keyboard selection
Pr 631
Clear RAM
Pr 666
Enter password for menu
Pr 690
Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings

Pr 695
_______________________________________________________________________
7.21.1
TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 600
Select 600
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr600
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= DHCP
02= Display of scale's current IP address
03= IP: IP address if no DHCP selected
04= Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected
05= Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected
06= DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected
06= DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected
08= Host name: A name can be assigned to the scales. 32 ASCII characters are possible.
09= Leasing address: Display of IP address that has been assigned to the scales by the
DHCP server.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 137
7
Programming
DHCP
Pr600
01
0
Submenu 01
Enter selection
0= no DHCP, use fixed IP address

1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.
The leasing address has been requested, see Pr 600/09.
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
If the DHCP server does not assign the requested leasing address,
set the leasing address to 000000000000 in Pr 600/09.
7
Then, the DHCP server assigns a new address to the scale.

_______________________________________________________________________
Display of scale current IP address

Submenu
Pr600
02
172017168010
02
confirm
IP: IP address if no DHCP selected

Submenu
03
Pr600
03
172017168010
Enter selection
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g.
172.17.168.10 would be 172017168010
confirm
Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected

Submenu
04
Enter selection
Pr600
04
255255192000
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 255.255.192.000 would be 255255192000.

confirm
Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected

Submenu
05
Enter selection
Pr600
05
172017129001
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172.17.129.1 would be 172017129001

confirm
7 - 138
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected

Submenu
06
Enter selection
Pr600
06
010001001100

confirm
DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected

Submenu
07
Enter selection
7
Pr600
07
010001001101

confirm
Host name:
Submenu
08
Enter name .
32 ASCII characters are possible.
Pr600
08
C32
LI H-
confirm
Leasing address
Display and input
The scales are assigned an IP address (leasing address) by the DHCP server. To do this,
DHCP has to be switched on, see Pr 600/01-1.
If the scales are switched off, the assigned address remains reserved for a certain time. If
the displayed leasing address is not changed, the scales request this address again from
the DHCP server after being switched on. By entering 000000000000 the DHCP server is
requested to assign a new address.
Submenu
09
Leasing address
Pr600
09
172017168008
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 139
Programming
7.21.2
..............................................
Pr601
Select 601
Pr601
confirm
7.21.3
7
172017168010
Printout of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602
Select 602
Pr602
confirm
confirm
The communication settings are printed out
Fig. 99: Communication settings
7.21.4
Setting scale number
.......................................................
Pr 603
Select 603
confirm
Pr603
Enter scale number
01-32
12
confirm
7 - 140
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.21.5
Setting department number
.............................................
Pr 604
Select 604
confirm
Pr604
Enter department number
001-999
120
7
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 141
Programming
7.21.6
Setting machine ID
...........................................................
Pr 605
Select 605
confirm
Pr605
1234
Enter machine ID
0001-9999
confirm
7
7.21.7
Commissioning (memory management)
...........................
Pr 606
Text memory in the BC II is dynamic. These memories include texts and logos. Depending
on the request, either more or less memory can be released for PLU, texts, or ticket items.
If changing a value, e.g. number of PLUs, causes the remaining memory to be too small,
the entry is rejected. In this case, other values, e.g. number of BLD text fields have to be
reduced.
Select 606
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr606
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= No. of PLUs
02= Number of supplementary texts per PLU
03= Number of BLD text fields per PLU
04= Number of BLD logo fields per PLU
05= Number of supplementary texts
06= Number of items (ticket memory)
07= By count, fixed weight and VAT
08= Decimal places*
09= Use expanded RAM
10= Journal function
07= Start database configuration
7 - 142
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Examples of valid database configuration

2000 PLU
4 supplementary texts per PLU
10 BLD text fields
3 BLD logo fields
500 general texts
1200 items
5000 PLU
3 supplementary texts per PLU
5 BLD text fields
2 BLD logo fields
1000 general texts
1200 items
6.111.98.5.01.18
7
7 - 143
Programming
No. of PLUs
Submenu
01
Enter selection
0100 - 10000
Pr606
01
2000
confirm
Number of supplementary texts per PLU

Submenu
7
02
Enter selection
0-4
Pr606
02
4
confirm
Number of BLD text fields per PLU

Submenu
03
Enter selection
0 - 10
Pr606
03
0
confirm
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU

Submenu
04
Enter selection
0-3
Pr606
04
0
confirm
Number of supplementary texts

Submenu
05
Enter selection
50 - 3000
Pr606
05
0500
confirm
7 - 144
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Number of items (ticket memory)

Submenu
06
Enter selection
50 - 3000
Pr606
06
1200
confirm
By count, fixed weight, VAT and tare %

See overview Defining by count article, on page 7 - 33
Submenu 07
Enter selection
1
1= By count on
7
Pr606
07
1111
1= Fixed weight on
1= Activate VAT
1= Tare % permitted
If tare 1% is permitted, the percentage can be entered in Pr110/ 22.
2
3
0= off
1= on
confirm
Decimal places*
*This menu is not enabled for all countries.
Submenu 08
Enter selection
Pr606
08
2
0-3 = Number of decimal places

4= Country-dependent standard value
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 145
Programming
Using expanded RAM

Submenu 09
_______________________________________________________________________
This function is only enabled if the CPU is equipped with an
expanded RAM.
- In the Pr 701 printout, there must be written 2 MB RAM.
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr606
09
0
Enter selection
7
0= without expanded RAM

1= with expanded RAM
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
Enable expanded memory only if many PLUs and large texts are
used.
If the expanded memory is not required in a scales system, do not
enable the expanded RAM. The expanded RAM slows down the system
during updates.
_______________________________________________________________________
Journal function
Submenu
10
Pr606
10
1
Enter selection
0= Ticket journal off
1= Ticket journal on
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
Recording with full ticket memory not possible. JournAl appears in
the display.
- Call-up and delete ticket journal via the EDP interface,e.g. with
WinCWS.
Registration is enabled again.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
In some countries, the journal function has to be enabled for amount
tend./change operation (Pr 520/ 5).
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 146
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Starting database configuration

Submenu
88
Remaining available memory is displayed.
Pr606
88
375539
Enter selection
Pr606
88
____90
81 = RAM clearing is carried out and the set configuration values are saved. The scales
boot.
90= RAM clearing is carried out and the standard values are saved.
The standard values are specific to country.
7
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 147
Programming
7.21.8
Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 607
Continuous operation in system see page 7 - 39.

Function as of program version 2.00.
_______________________________________________________________________
Always note!
- There must be only one master scale in a scale system.
- Each scale within the system must have its own IP network
address (Pr 600).
_______________________________________________________________________
7
Select 607
confirm
Enter submenu
01-04
Pr 607
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Scale type
02= Multicast IP address
03= Multicast port number
04= UDP Port number
Scale type
Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr 607
01
1
0= standard scale (Stand alone)

1= Slave scale (system)
9= Master scale (system)
confirm
7 - 148
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
System conditions with slave scales.

If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling
message on the display.
-
Scale Network off

Scale not entered in system yet.
Scale Update
Update of system data running.
If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master
data from master scale are stored.
Arrow flashes on display = slave scale in system.
_______________________________________________________________________
If the system arrow
scale in the system.
is flashing, the device functions as master
_______________________________________________________________________
Multicast IP address
Submenu 02
The Mulitcast IP address indicates to which system the scale was assigned. Any address
within the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 can be assigned. All scales in one
system must have the same Mulitcast IP address.
Pr 607
02
239192000024
Enter address
confirm
Multicast port number

Submenu 03
Basically the works setting must not be changed.
Multicast port number factory settings
Pr 607
03
06789
confirm
UDP port number

Submenu 04
Basically the works setting must not be changed.
UDP port number factory settings
Pr 607
04
01031
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 149
7
Programming
7.21.9
Controlling display lightning
..........................................
Pr 610
Select 610
confirm
Pr610
00
Enter selection
00= Display lighting can only be switched on or off manually.
7
01-99 = Time in seconds.

Display lighting is automatically switched on or off after the set time.
confirm
Switch display lighting on manually:
+
Press and hold the <Shift> key

then press the <Switch> key.
The display lighting is switched on or off.

Automatic control of the display lighting:
After the last action performed on the scale, the display lighting switches off automatically
after 1 to 99 seconds.
Setting 01
Display off after approx. 1 second.
Setting 99
Display off after approx. 99 seconds.
When another action starts on the scale, the display lighting is switched on again
automatically.
_______________________________________________________________________
When the display lighting is controlled automatically, the lighting can
still be manually switched off.
If the display lighting is switched off manually, the display lighting can
only be switched on again manually.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 150
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.21.10
Setting turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 615
After a set time the scale is switched off, providing no key function or weight movement
takes place.
Prerequisite
A switch key as main switch.
With the on/off switch, the scale must be manually switched off.
Select 615
7
confirm
Pr615
00
Enter selection
00= Scale is not turned off.

01-99 = Time in minutes, after which the scales are switched off, if no keys are pressed and
no weight movement has taken place.
confirm
7.21.11
WLAN settings
Pr 621
Prerequisite
- A WLAN module must be integrated into the scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
Settings can only be made in submenus 02 to 07 if WLAN is
deactivated;621/ 01 -0.
If 00000000 has been entered in 621/ 02, WLAN cannot be activated.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 621
confirm
Enter submenu
confirm
Pr621
01
Submenu overview:
01= Activate WLAN
02= Time slices
03= Ping on/off
04= IP address of WLAN module
05= Test telegram on/off
06= IP address of telegram recipient
07= Port number of telegram recipient
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 151
Programming
Activating WLAN
Submenu
01
Pr621
01
0
Enter selection
0= WLAN off
1= WLAN on
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
Procedure for WLAN activation:
- Deactivate WLAN 621/ 01 -0
- Make settings in submenus 02 to 07
- Activate WLAN 621/ 01 -1
7
_______________________________________________________________________
Time slices
The time for which WLAN is to be active can be set.
Submenu
02
Enter time slice no., e.g. 1

0-3
confirm
Enter start and end time
1
Start time, e.g. 20.00 hours
2
Pr621
02
_ -________
Pr606
02
1 -00000000
Pr621
02
1 - ________
Pr621
02
1 -20000800
End time, e.g. 08.00 hours
Active for the whole day= enter 00010001.

Time slice inactive= enter 00000000.
Esc
confirm
Pr621
02
_ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Press <ESC>
Pr621
02
You can now select submenu 3.
7 - 152
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Ping on/off
If ping is activated, the scale sends a ping to the WLAN module at set time intervals.
Submenu
03
Enter time
Recommended setting 300 sec.
Pr621
03
_300
0000= Ping off

1-9999 = Ping on; time in sec. between 2 pings.
confirm
7
IP address of WLAN module
The WLAN module is pinged by the scale, so that it always remains in active status.
Submenu
04
Enter IP address
Pr621
04
172017168001
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 stands for 172.17.168.1
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 153
Programming
Submenus 05, 06 and 07 enable functional diagnosis of the WLAN.
Test telegram on/off

A test telegram is periodically sent to a host.
Submenu
05
Enter time
Pr621
05
0900
0000= Telegram off

1-9999 = Send telegram on; time in sec. between 2 telegrams.
confirm
7
IP address of telegram recipient
Submenu
06
Enter IP address
Pr621
06
172017168001
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 stands for 172.17.168.1
confirm
Port number of telegram recipient

Submenu
07
Enter port number
Pr621
07
49152
1 - 65536
confirm
7.21.12
Beeper on/off
Pr 622
Select 622
confirm
Pr622
Enter selection
1
Normal beeper
2
Acceptance beeper
Error beeper
111
1
0= Beeper off
1= Beeper on
save
7 - 154
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.21.13
Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 625
The sensitivity setting regulates damping in the event of vibrations at the place of
installation (e.g. market operation).
_______________________________________________________________________
The higher the setting, the longer the time until standstill of the
display.
_______________________________________________________________________
7
Select 625
confirm
Pr625
Enter selection
0= Display sensitive (standard) with stable, vibration-free scale floor area

1
2
increasingly insensitive
..
5= Display insensitive to vibrations
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 155
Programming
7.21.14
Changing key functions
Prerequisite
- Pr 631 - 03
...................................................
Pr 630
84-key keyboard reprogrammed; must be set.
Select 630
Pr630
0
confirm
7
Pr630
_____
Press <Enter>.
The function is active.
{
Press any key,e.g.<PLU
50
50>.
The function code of this
key is displayed.
Pr630
32817
Enter new function

code,e.g.<33281> for
Fixed tare 2.
Pr630
33281
Press <Enter>.
The new key function is
saved.
Another key can be
modified.
Pr630
_____
Press <Mod>. The menu is exited.

_______________________________________________________________________
-
The function code of reserved keys, e.g. <Mod>; <ESC>; <C> etc.
is not displayed and cannot be modified.
If <00000> is entered instead of a function code, the standard
function code becomes active.
In menu 630, all keys are reset to the standard function code by
pressing <CTRL> and <9>.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 156
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Overview of keyboard function codes

Code
12
32768 - 33023
33024 - 33039
33280 - 33283
33344
33345
33346
33347
33348
33538
33539
33540
33541
33542
33543
33544
33546
33548
33580
33588
33589
34066
34069
6.111.98.5.01.18
Function
Paper feed
Direct PLU key 1 - 256
Direct operator key 1 - 16
Fixed tare key 1 - 4
VAT key 1
VAT key 2
VAT key 3
VAT key 4
VAT key 5
Tare
Subtotal
Total
Constant
Manual
Minus
Cancellation
Multiplication
Switch from PLU input to price input
Set scale to zero
Operator tare
Save operator tare
Date key
Print key
7
7 - 157
Programming
7.21.15
Keyboard selection
..........................................................
Pr631
Select 631
confirm
Pr631
Enter
7
00=
01=
02=
03=
selection
03
84-keyboard standard
84-keyboard with 24 self-service frame
84-keyboard with 30-front foil
84-keyboard reprogrammed. (e.g. keyboard changes from host)
Depending on the country, additional settings can be made for the 500 version.
10= Standard 84-keyboard with additional 48-keyboard
11= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with additional 48-keyboard
13= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additional 48-keyboard
23= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additional 96-keyboard
confirm
Keyboards, see page 5 - 7
7 - 158
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
7.21.16
RAM clearing
....................................................................
Pr 666
Select 666
Pr666
confirm
00
Pr666
81
Enter 81
7
confirm
RAM is cleared
_______________________________________________________________________
The following settings remain even after the RAM clearing:
- Communication settings in Pr 600
- Printer settings in Pr 710
- Machine ID Pr 605
- Commissioning (memory management). The values set in Pr 606
are applied.
_______________________________________________________________________
7.21.17
Entering password for menu
...........................................
Pr 690
Select 690
PASS
confirm
PASS
Enter password
000000
000000 = Password is deactivated

XXXXXX= Enter 6 numbers
confirm
Password entry is activated.
If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 159
Programming
7.21.18
Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting
..............
Pr 695
Select 695
confirm
Pr695
01
Enter submenu
7
Submenu overview:
01= Change main currency to second currency (Euro)
02= Convert PLU price into EURO
confirm
Changing main currency to second currency (Euro)

Submenu
01
Pr695
01
0
Enter selection
0= Main currency in old local currency
1= Main currency in new local currency
confirm
Converting PLU price into EURO

Submenu 02
_______________________________________________________________________
This function can only be executed if the old local currency is still
active.
The sales are not converted. Sales should be deleted.
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr695
02
1
confirm
The prices are converted and the second currency is then changed to
automatically.
7 - 160
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22
Service menu Pr 7--
_______________________________________________________________________
Test print
Pr 700
Print boot log information
Pr 701
Print fonts
Pr702
Print menu settings
Pr703
Print weighing system information
Pr 704
Printer settings
Pr 710
DisplayADC programming version
Pr 712
Display load cell type
Pr 715
Program version
Pr 716
Display battery voltage
Pr717
Display test
Pr718
Logbook monitoring
Pr 730
_______________________________________________________________________
7.22.1
Test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700
Select 700
confirm
confirm
Fig. 100: Test printing
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 161
7
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.2
Printing boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701
Select 701
confirm
confirm
7
Fig. 101: Example of log information
7 - 162
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.3
Printing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr702
Select 702
Pr702
1
confirm
Print with ticket paper

confirm
7
All fonts are printed.

Print with labels
confirm
The first 4 fonts are printed.
Fig. 102: Font types
confirm
The next 4 fonts are printed.
Press the <Total> key as often as required until all font types have been printed.
7.22.4
Printing menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703
Select 703
confirm
Pr703
0
confirm
The current menu settings are being printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 163
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.5
Printing weighing system information
Select 704
confirm
............................
Pr 704
Pr704
0
confirm
Weighing system information is printed.
7
Fig. 103: Weighing system

information
7 - 164
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.6
Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710
Select 710
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr710
01
confirm
7
Submenu overview:
01 = Feed for labels (+/- 1.5mm)
02= Move print format on the label (+/- 1.5mm)
03= Correct ticket feed (+/- 2.5mm)
04= Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket
Feed for labels

Submenu
01
Enter selection
Pr710
01
12
00-1 1= minus infeed

12= Standard settings
13-24 = plus infeed
confirm
Moving print format on the label

Submenu
02
Enter selection
Pr710
02
12
00-1 1= minus infeed

13-24 = plus infeed
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 165
Programming
Service Pr 7--
Correcting ticket feed

Submenu
03
Pr710
03
20
Enter selection
00-19 = minus infeed
21-40 = plus infeed
confirm
7
Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket

In the case of printers with light barriers (label printer) this is where sensitivity for
paper-end detection is set.
When the end of the paper is reached, printing is automatically interrupted and the display
shows the message PAPER END.
Submenu
04
Pr710
04
40
Enter selection
00= End of paper detection off
40= Standard
increasingly insensitive
..
99= insensitive
confirm
Changing print intensity

Legibility of rotated barcodes can be improved by reducing the print intensity.
Submenu
05
Enter selection
0=
1=
2=
3=
Pr710
05
0
no reduction
Reduce print intensity by 10%
confirm
7 - 166
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.7
Displaying ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712
Select 712
confirm
Pr712
6026500004
7.22.8
Displaying load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715
Select 715
confirm
Pr715
Cod
6.111.98.5.01.18
150502
7 - 167
7
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.9
Displaying program version
............................................
Pr 716
Select 716
confirm
Enter submenu
Pr716
01
confirm
7
Submenu overview:
01= Main program version number
02= Bootloader version number
03= Option resource version number
04= Layout resource version number
05= Menu resource version number
06= Text resource version number
07= Keyboard resource version number
08= Font resource version number
09= Software version number (SAP number)
Main program version number

Submenu
01
Bootloader version number

Submenu
02
Option resource version number

Submenu
03
Layout resource version number

Submenu
04
Menu resource version number

Submenu
05
Text resource version number

Submenu
06
Keyboard resource version number

Submenu
07
Font resource version number

Submenu
08
Software version number

Submenu
7 - 168
09
Pr716
01
00661117100140
Pr716
02
00061119500110
Pr716
03
00161117200140
Pr716
04
00061117300150
Pr716
05
00061117400140
Pr716
06
00061117500130
Pr716
07
00061117600110
Pr716
08
00061117700120
Pr716
09
61117000140
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.10
Displaying battery voltage
...............................................
Pr 717
Select 717
Pr717
1
confirm
confirm
Pr717
12,218
_______________________________________________________________________
If the scale is connected to the mains, the supply voltage
(approx. 12 V) is displayed.
- Disconnect scale from mains supply!
The battery voltage is displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 169
7
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.11
Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718
Select 718
confirm
Pr718
1
confirm
The display shows all figures and symbols.
7
Fig. 104: Display test

Close display test
7 - 170
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service Pr 7--
7.22.12
Logbook control
Pr 730
In menu Pr 730, Welmec information from the logbook can be queried.

Select 730
confirm
Enter submenu
01= Display logbook
02= Print logbook
Pr730
01
7
confirm
Display logbook
Submenu
01
Step 1 Software identification number. (Software ID)

Accessing information
Entries from installation are displayed in three steps.
Consecutive number of log book entry,
Department number,
Component number.
Version number of the loaded software.
Date and time of download.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 171
Programming
Service Pr 7--
Example: Accessing logbook entries
Pr
Press key<Mod>.
Press the keys <7> <3> <0> on
Pr730
10-digit keyboard.
7
Press <Enter> key
Pr730
01
1
Press <Enter> key
Pr730
01
1
Press key Enter<>.

for step 1
1
Software ID
Version number of legally relevant part
Version number of legally non-relevant part
Pr730
A10F
002
0200
Press key Enter < for further steps.>
Serial number of the entry
Department number
Component number
Software ID
Version number of legally relevant part
Version number of legally non-relevant part
Date DDMMYY
Time
7 - 172
Pr730
9
20
1
12
Pr730
A10F
002
0200
Pr730
140910
1
1058
2
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service Pr 7--
If there are further entries in the logbook, the next entry is displayed.
Department number
Component number
Pr730
8
20
1
12
3
Pr730
bc 01 001 0170
Version number of the loaded software
7
Date
Time
Pr730
090410
1432
Hold down the <Enter> key until all logbook entries are displayed.
Once all entries are displayed, the scale shows the next submenu.
Pr730
02
Print logbook
Requirement
- Receipt paper is in the printer.
- Pr 505 -0
Ticket paper
Submenu
02
confirm
1
Logbook is printed.
Department number
Component number
Version number of the loaded software
Date
Time
Fig. 105: Logbook printout

6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 173
Programming
Programming overview
7.23
Menus marked with an asterisk *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all
country versions.
7
PLU maintenance
Menu
Define PLU Enter PLU number
Pr 110
Sub.
see page
7 - 43
Unit price
01
7 - 44
Product group
02
7 - 44
Tare
03
7 - 44
Use-by date
04
7 - 45
Barcode for article
05
7 - 45
Price overwrite
0= not permissible
1= permissible
06
7 - 46
Article type
0= weighed
1= manual
2= minus
3= By count (price refers to pieces per package)
4= Fixed weight
5= By count fixed weight (fixed weight and price refer to
pieces per package)
07
7 - 46
Weight class
0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb
08
7 - 47
Data of origin
0= without data of origin
09
7 - 47
Enter PLU product text

(PLU number 0001-9999)
Traceability text (number 9900-9999)
10
7 - 47
Supplementary text XX - YYYYYYYYY

XX= Supplementary text 01-04
YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200
11
7 - 48
Supplementary text for BLD text fields XX YYYYYYYYY

XX= Supplementary text 01-10
YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200
12
7 - 48
Logo printing in BLD logo fields 1 - 3
13
7 - 49
7 - 174
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
PLU maintenance
Menu
Sub.
see page
Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes

00 to 99
Pr 110
14
7 - 49
Unit price back-calculation

0= without back calculation
1= with back-calculation (the unit price per piece or for
fixed weight per kg is calculated)
15
7 - 50
Mandatory input of pieces

0= no mandatory input
16
7 - 50
Fixed weight
00000-99999
17
7 - 50
Fixed weight mode

(A second representation is also printed in brackets)
0= Standard
1= lbs (g)
2= oz (lbs)
3= oz (g)
4= lbs (oz)
18
7 - 50

0= no mandatory input
19
7 - 51
Assign VAT number to a PLU 1-5
20
7 - 51
VAT can be overwritten

0= cannot be overwritten
1= can be overwritten
21
7 - 51
Tare %
22
7 - 52
7
000.00 (dependent on country)
Print PLU (article) lists
Pr 115
7 - 53
Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with all product lines
01
7 - 53
Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with only the first product line
02
7 - 53
Delete single PLUs (article)
Pr 120
7 - 54
Delete PLUs (article) from xxxxxx to yyyyyy
Pr 121
7 - 54
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 175
Programming
Data maintenance
Menu
Sub.
see page
Supplement. texts enter text number 1-999999999
Pr 200
7 - 55
Pr 201
7 - 56
Define scrolling message

Enter text number 01-99
Pr 202
7 - 57
Print texts
Pr 205
7 - 58
Create supplementary text

Enter text number 01-99
7
01
Print header and footer texts
02
Print scrolling message
03
Delete texts
Pr 206
7 - 59
Delete single supplementary text
01
Delete all supplementary texts
02
Delete header and footer texts
03
Delete scrolling message text
04
Define barcode structure
Pr 210
7 - 60
7 - 61
Barcode format
01
Code constant
02
7 - 62
Numerical codes
03
7 - 62
Check and adopt code structure
04
7 - 64
Managing barcode structures
Pr 211
7 - 65
Print code structures
01
7 - 65
Delete code structures
02
7 - 65
Code structure number for all PLUs
03
7 - 66
04
7 - 66
05
7 - 66
7 - 176
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data maintenance
Menu
Non-PLU settings
Pr 215
Sub.
see page
7 - 67
Sell-by date for non-programmed articles

(non-PLU)
01
7 - 67
Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles
02
7 - 68
Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece

goods)
03
7 - 68
Barcode for non-PLU minus products
04
7 - 68
Barcode for total
05
7 - 68
Product group for non-PLU weighed
06
7 - 69
Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece

goods)
07
7 - 69
Product groups for non-PLU minus articles
08
7 - 69
VAT for non-PLU weighed
09
7 - 70
VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods)
10
7 - 70
VAT for non-PLU minus articles
11
7 - 70
Define PLU number for non-PLU article
99
7 - 70
Print BLD label list/ logo list
Pr 220
7 - 71
Print BLD label list
01
Print logos
02
Delete BLD labels/logos
Pr 225
Delete BLD label list from - to
01
7 - 72
Delete BLD logos from - to
02
7 - 72
Define VAT
Enter VAT number 1-5
Pr 230
7 - 72
VAT set 0-99,99
01
7 - 73

0= VAT inclusive (gross prices)
1= VAT exclusive (net prices)
02
7 - 73
VAT text, 20 characters possible
03
Manage VAT
Pr 231
Print list with VAT rates 0
01
Delete VAT sets 1...5 - 1...5
02
Use VAT:
0= Use VAT from PLU and non-PLU
1-5 = Use VAT for all articles
03
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 74
7 - 177
7
Programming
7
Data maintenance
Menu
Configure report layout
Pr 300
Sub.
see page
7 - 75
Print prices
0= Prices are not printed
1= Prices are printed
01
7 - 75
Print PLUs without sales

0= PLUs without sales are not printed
1= PLUs without sales are printed
02
7 - 75
Printcustomer name for PLU report

00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number
03
7 - 75
Print customer name for product group report

04
Print customer name for operator report

05
Print customer name for total sales per scale and per
operator report
06
Print customer name for data of origin report

07
Print customer name for VAT report

08
7 - 178
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Data maintenance
Menu
Print reports on ticket
Pr 310
Sub.
see page
7 - 77
Scale report
01
7 - 77
PLU report with one article text line

02
7 - 77
PLU report with all article text lines

03
7 - 78
Product group report
04
7 - 79
Operator report
05
7 - 80
Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text

line
06
7 - 81
Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text

lines
07
7 - 81
VAT sales report

08
7 - 82
Print report on label
7
Pr 311
Print scale total sales
7 - 82
01
Display / delete sales
Pr 320
7 - 82
7 - 83
Display scale total sales
01
7 - 83
Delete scale total sales
02
7 - 83
99
7 - 83
Delete journal from device
6.111.98.5.01.18
90= delete
7 - 179
Programming
7
Configuration
Menu
Set date and time
Pr 500
Sub.
see page
7 - 84
Setting date
01
7 - 85
Setting time
02
7 - 85
Print year either 2 or 4-digital

03
7 - 85
Date representation variants

00= Day-month-year numeric
e.g 21.07.06
01= Day-month-year alphanumeric
e.g 21.07.06
02= Day-month alphanumeric
e.g 21 July
03= Month-year alphanumeric
e.g July06
04= Month Day Year American numeric
05= Month Day Year American alphanumeric
06= Year month day Hungarian numeric
07= Year month day Hungarian alphanumeric
08= Day-month-year numeric
e.g 21.07.06
09= Day month year alphanumeric
e.g. 21 July 06
04
7 - 86
Set main operating mode
Pr 510
7 - 87
Select main operating mode

01
7 - 87
Select layout
1= Label layout
02
7 - 87

0 = without addition of customer total
1 = with addition of customer total
03
7 - 88
Select paper type

0= Ticket paper
04
7 - 88
7 - 180
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Configuration
Menu
Set switching operating mode
Pr 511
Sub.
see page
7 - 89
Select switching operating mode

01
7 - 89
Select layout
1= Label layout
02
7 - 89

0 = without addition of customer total
1 = with addition of customer total
03
7 - 90
Select paper type

0= Ticket paper
04
7 - 90
7
Pr 515
7 - 90
Automatic zero setting

0= Scale is set to zero.
1= Zero setting error 115 is displayed
2= Scale is not set to zero.
01
7 - 90
Open tickets / labels

0= Open tickets are printed
after scale off/on
1= Open tickets are not printed and deleted
02
7 - 91
Origin labeling
0= Origin labeling off
1= Enter data of origin number manually
2= Data of origin number permanently defined
03
Define data of origin number

00-99 Use permanently defined data of origin number.
04
Negative customer total permitted/not permitted

0= The total cannot become negative during sale
1= the total can become negative during sale
05
7 - 91
Sales calculation
0= The sold items are not added to total memory
1= The sold items are added to total memory
06
7 - 92
Mandatory input for By count pieces

0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 16)
1= Mandatory input for by count piece
07
Mandatory input for fixed weight

0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 19)
1= Mandatory input for fixed weight
08
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 181
Programming
7
Configuration
Menu
Scrolling message setting
Pr 516
Sub.
7 - 93
Select scrolling message

00= Scrolling message not active
01-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202
01
Display on
0= Customer side
1= Operator side
2= Both sides
02
Activation of scrolling message

0= When display is occupied and empty
1= Only when display is empty
03
Test scrolling message
04
Settings for multi-operator mode
see page
Pr 520
7 - 94

0= Only fix the unit price during sale
1= Only fix the tare value during sale
2= Fix unit price and tare value during sale
01
Print article and total label

0= Print article labels and total label
2= Only print article labels
02
7 - 95
Operator items display mode 000

1= Display for sheet cancellation
1= Display after registration
1= Display for total/subtotal
03
7 - 96
Cash register functions

0= Cash drawer does not open
1= Cash register opens with/without sale using total and
operator key
2= Cash register opens only with sale using total and
operator key
3= Cash register opens with sale using total and operator
key
4= Cash register opens only with sale using total and
operator key
04
Amount tend./change operation

0= without amount tend./change operation
1= Amount tend./change operation with a currency
2= Combined amount tend./change operation in local cur
rency and foreign currency *
05
7 - 182
7 - 97
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Configuration
Menu
Sub.
see page
Talon printout
00= without talon
01-99= with talon the entered number corresponds to
the delay time in seconds
Pr 520
06
7 - 97
Repeat ticket
0= without repeat ticket
1= with repeat ticket
07
Open ticket again

0= without ticket reopening
1= with ticket reopening
08
Print cancellation and canceled articles

0= no printout
1= with printout
09
7 - 99
Print included VAT

0= no printout
1= with printout
10
7 - 99
Print ticket after <Total>

0= Print ticket as requested with<Shift> +<OPx>)
1= Always print ticket
11
7 - 99
Setting for quick service mode

Pr 521
0 =Article accessing via PLU-direct key, registration with
operator key.
1= Article call-up via PLU direct key, automatic recor
ding.
6.111.98.5.01.18
7
7 - 100
7 - 183
Programming
7
Configuration
Menu
Settings for price labeling mode *
Pr 525
Sub.
7 - 101
Labeling mode
0= Label printing with sales price 0.00 is not supported.
1= Weight labeling
Label print with selling price 0.00 is possible.
2= Only Weight labeling
Label print with selling price 0.00 is possible.
01
Multiple label printing for price per piece

00= Labels are printed one after the other
without delay.
01 - 99= Delay time in seconds. Labels
are printed consecutively
with delay.
02
Allocate operator no. to operator keys

TT-VVV
TT
(keys 1-16)
VVV (operator 1-999)
7 - 184
Pr 530
see page
7 - 103
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Configuration
Menu
PLU input mode and range limitation
Pr 535
Sub.
see page
7 - 103
10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input

0 = Unit price via 10-key keypad
Switching to PLU input with shift key
1 = PLU no. input via 10-key keypad
Switching to unit price input with shift key
2= PLU no. input only via 10-key keypad
01
PLU input:
Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.
2= PLU input with 2 digits
02
PLU-direct key mode

0= PLU-key no. (PLU direct keyboard) corresponds to
the PLU no.
1= PLU direct keyboard is locked
2= PLU number results from the PLU key allocation, see
sub 4
03
PLU direct key allocation

XXX-YYYYYY
XXX= PLU direct key 001-246
YYYYYY= PLU number 001-999999
04
PLU range limitation

000001-999999
05
7 - 105
PLU call delay time

0= PLU is displayed with <Enter> or after entering all di
gits.
1-20 = The PLU is displayed after a delay time. 1= short
delay; 20= long delay
06
7 - 106
7 - 104
Print PLU direct keys
Pr 536
7 - 107
Tare fixed value memory 1-4

X-YYYY
X= Direct tare key 1-4
YYYY= Assigned tare values
Pr 540
7 - 108
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 185
7
Programming
7
Configuration
Menu
Rounding and price calculation settings for national

currency
Pr 545
Sub.
see page
7 - 108
Rounding methods for customer total

0= no rounding
01
7 - 109

0= no rounding
02
7 - 109
Rounding for By count

0= mathematical
1= round up next position
03
7 - 186
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Configuration
Menu
Sub.
Receipt design overview

Design ticket
see page
7 - 111
Pr 550
7 - 112
Print barcode on ticket 000

1= Article barcode on; 0= off
1= Total barcode on; 0= off
1= Talon barcode on; 0= off
01
Barcode height in mm on ticket

5-22 mm
02
7 - 112
Print tare on ticket

0= Do not print tare value on ticket
1= Tare value net weight is identified with N (country-de
pendent character)
2= Tare value on ticket net weight is not identified with N
03
7 - 113
Print header text

00= without header text
01-99 = Header text number
04
Print footer text

00= without footer text
01-99 = Footer text number
05
Foreign currency supplementary text

000000000= without foreign currency supplementary text
1-999999999 = Foreign currency supplementary text
number
06
7 - 114
Rounding supplementary text

000000000= without rounding supplementary text
1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number
07
7 - 114

000= Font from PLU
001-1 10= Defined font
08
Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket

0= all article text lines are printed
1-9 = the corresponding number of lines is printed
10= text lines not printed
09
Ticket counter printout

0= Counter is not printed
1= Counter is printed
10
6.111.98.5.01.18
7 - 115
7 - 187
7
Programming
7
Configuration
Menu
Sub.
see page
Print foreign currency 0000

1= Print conversion rate
1= Print unit price, selling price and total
1= Print selling price and total
1= Only print total
Pr 550
11
7 - 116
Print amount paid in/out

0= No printout
1= Printout
12
7 - 116

0= No printout
1= Printout
13
7 - 116
Print header logo

0000 = No printout
14
7 - 117
Print footer logo

0= No printout
15
7 - 117
Label design - overview
7 - 118
BLD labels
7 - 119
Design label
Pr 555
7 - 120
Label type
00= label from BLD
01 ... predefined label from scales
01
7 - 121
Select BLD label

Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01
1.. Select BLD label.
02
7 - 122
Label size HHH-WW

HHH= Label height 28-105 mm
WW= Label width 10-58 mm
03
Change label distance

8-40 dot ( 8dot= 1mm)
04
Packed-on and sell-by date on label 00

1= Packed-on date on; 0= off
1= Sell-by date on; 0= off
05
7 - 122
Barcode on label 00
1= Article barcode on; 0= off
1= Total barcode on; 0= off
06
7 - 123
7 - 188
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Configuration
Menu
Sub.
Barcode height in mm
5 - 22mm
Pr 555
07
see page
Tara printout on label

0= without tare
1= with tare
08
Print header text

00= without header text
01-99 = header text number
09
7 - 124
Alternative text with sell-by date

000000000= No alternative text.
1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text
10
7 - 124
Logo printout
enter
0000= without logo
0001-9999 = Logo ID (print logo)
11
7 - 124

Beginning of text field in mm 11 - 84
12
7 - 125

Beginning of data field in mm 11 - 84
13
Data field monitoring

0= off
1= active
14
7 - 126

0= Font from PLU
1= fixed font
15
7 - 127
16
7 - 127
Print price frame and texts on label:

1= Print TARE
1= Print Packed on
1= Print best before
1= Print Net or Pcs
1= Print Price
1= Print price frame
1= Print supplementary text
6.111.98.5.01.18
7
0000000
7 - 189
Programming
7
Configuration
Menu
Sub.
see page
Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit on label

0= without output
1= with operator no.
2= with machine ID
3= with digit code *
Pr 555
17
7 - 127
Print foreign currency: 0000

1= Print conversion rate
1= Print unit price, selling price and total
1= Print selling price and total
1= Only print total
18
7 - 128
Rotate label layout by 180o and reverse operation

11
1= Print label rotated
1= Reverse label before printing
19
Alternative text for packed-on date

0= Standard text from resource
1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200
20
7 - 130
Alternative text for use-by date

0= Standard text from resource
1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200
21
7 - 130
Print units on the label 1111

1= Print price with unit
1= Print unit price with unit
1= Print weight with unit
1= Print tare with unit
22
7 - 130
Print speed for label layout

00= 44 mm/s
01= 53 mm/s (battery operation)
02= 66 mm/s
03= 88 mm/s
04= 102 mm/s (Standard)
23
7 - 130
7 - 190
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Configuration
Menu
Label configuration management
Pr 556
Sub.
7 - 131
Save configuration from 555

1-3 Layout memory is only possible if memory is deleted
(556 / 03)
01
Select label configuration

0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing
1= Configuration from memory 1
02
Delete label configuration

Delete memory 1-3
03
7 - 132
7
Pr 560 *
7 - 133
Select foreign currency function

0= Euro/foreign currency off
1= Euro function on
2= Foreign currency function on
01
Select foreign/ second currency display

0= Foreign currency display off
(Euro or foreign currency key non-operational)
1= Foreign currency display on
Display unit and selling price, total and/or
subtotal and total in amount tend./change operation
02
Foreign currency calculation method

0= Total calculated through conversion
1= Total calculated through addition of
selling price
03
Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout
04
Foreign currency symbol on label for price field
05
Decimal places in foreign currency

0-3 decimal places
06
Foreign currency factor

0-4 Factor 1 / 10 / 100 / 1000 /10000
07
6.111.98.5.01.18
see page
7 - 134
7 - 135
7 - 191
Programming
7
Configuration
Menu
Sub.
Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)

e.g. 0001.01 (national unit e.g. )
Pr 560
08
see page
Rounding of foreign currency

0= no rounding
09
7 - 135
Calculation of foreign currency price

0= Internal calculation in foreign currency
1= Internal calculation in national currency.
10
7 - 136
Ticket call-up data volume 111

1= Transfer of total EAN code. 0= without
1= Transfer of Item EAN code. 0= without
1= Transfer of article text. 0= without
7 - 192
Pr 570
7 - 136
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Database configuration
Menu
TCP-IP settings
Pr 600
Sub.
7 - 137
DHCP
0= No DHCP, use permanent IP addresses
1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.
01
Display of current IP address
02
IP: IP address if no DHCP selected
03
Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected
04
Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected
05
DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP

selected
06
DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP

selected
07
Enter host name 32 ASCII characters are possible.
08
Leasing address from DHCP
09
Pr 601
Printout of communication settings
Pr 602
Set scale number

01 - 32
Pr 603
Set department no
001-999
Pr 604
Set machine ID
0001 - 9999
Pr 605
6.111.98.5.01.18
see page
7 - 138
7
7 - 139
7 - 140
7 - 142
7 - 193
Programming
Menu
Commissioning (memory management).
Pr 606
Number of PLUs
100 - 10000
see page
7 - 142
01
7 - 144
02
7 - 144
03
7 - 144
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 0 - 3
04
7 - 144
Number of supplementary texts
50- 3000
05
7 - 144
Number of items (ticket memory)
50- 3000
06
7 - 145
By count, fixed weight and VAT

0000
1= By count on; 0= off
1= Fixed weight on; 0= off
1= VAT activated; 0= deactivated
1= Tare % permitted, 0= Tare % not permitted (depen
dent on country)
07
7 - 145
Decimal places
0-3 = Number of decimal places
4= Standard value (dependent on country)
08
7 - 145
Expanded RAM, 0 = do not use, 1 = use
09
7 - 146
Journal function
0= Ticket journal off
1= Ticket journal on
10
7 - 146
Start commissioning
88
7 - 147
Number of supplementary texts per PLU

Number of BLD text fields per PLU
7
Sub.
0-4
00 - 10
Set scale for system

(as from program version 2.00)
Pr 607
7 - 148
Scale type 0= Stand alone; 1= Slave; 9= Master
01
7 - 148
Multicast IP address
02
7 - 149
Multicast IP port number
03
7 - 149
UDP port number
04
7 - 149
7 - 194
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Menu
Sub.
Control display lighting

00= automatic display illumination off
1-99 = automatic display illumination on
Pr 610
7 - 150
Scales switch-off time

1-99 in minutes
Pr 615
7 - 151
WLAN settings
Settings 02-07 only possible
if WLAN module is switched off (Pr 621/01)
Pr 621
7
Module on/off
0= WLAN off
1= WLAN on
01
Time slices for WLAN on/off in a defined period of time

X-YYYYYYYY
X= 1-3 time slices
YYYYYYYY= Time on/off
02
Ping interval
0000= Ping off
0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec.
Start of ping interval, when WLAN on (Pr 621/01)
03
IP address for WLAN 000000000000
04
Test telegram to host

0= Transmission off
0001-9999 = Interval between 2 transmissions in sec.
05
IP address of telegram recipient

000000000000
06
Port number of telegram recipient

0001-65536 (standard= 49152)
07
Beeper on/off 000

1= Normal beeper on; 0= off
1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off
1= Error beeper on; 0= off
6.111.98.5.01.18
see page
Pr 622
7 - 195
Programming
7
Menu
Sub.
Scale (display) sensitivity 0-5

0= Display sensitive
..
5= Display less sensitive against vibrations
Pr 625
7 - 155
Reconfigure keyboard
Pr 630
7 - 156
Keyboard selection
Pr 631
00= 84-keyboard standard
01= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame
02= 84-keyboard with 30
front foil
03= 84-keyboard, reprogrammed
11= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with addi
tional 48-keyboard
tional 48-keyboard
13= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additio
nal 48-keyboard
tional 96-keyboard
tional 96-keyboard
23= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additio
nal 96-keyboard
7 - 158
Clear RAM
81 RAM is cleared
Pr 666
7 - 159
Enter password for menu

XXXXXX 6-digit numeric password
000000 Password is deactivated
Pr 690
Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings
Pr 695
7 - 160
Change main currency to second currency

0= Main currency in old local currency
1= Main currency in new local currency
01
Convert PLU price into Euro
02
7 - 196
see page
6.111.98.5.01.18
Programming
Service
Menu
Sub.
see page
Test printing
Pr 700
7 - 161
Print boot log information
Pr 701
7 - 161
Print fonts
Pr 702
7 - 163
Print menu settings
Pr 703
7 - 163
Print weighing system information
Pr 704
7 - 164
Printer settings
Pr 710
7 - 165
Infeed for labels

00 - 11
= minus feed
12
Standard settings
13-24
plus infeed
01
Move print format on the label

00 - 11
= minus feed
12
Standard settings
13-24
plus infeed
02
7 - 165
Correct ticket feed

00-19
minus feed
20
Standard settings
21-40
plus infeed
03
7 - 166
Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket

00-99 (the higher the number, the less sensitive is detec
tion)
00= Paper end detection off
04
Change print intensity

0= no reduction
1= Reduce print intensity by 10%
05
Display ADC program version
Pr 712
Detailed display
Pr 714
Display ADC type
Pr 715
6.111.98.5.01.18
7
7 - 167
7 - 167
7 - 197
Programming
7
Service
Menu
Display program version
Pr 716
Sub.
7 - 168
Main program
Version number
01
Boot loader
Version number
02
Option ressource
Version number
03
Layout ressource
Version number
04
Menu ressource
Version number
05
Text ressource
Version number
06
Keyboard ressource Version number
07
Font ressource
08
Version number
SAP number
see page
09
Display battery voltage
Pr 717
7 - 169
Display test
Pr 718
7 - 170
Logbook monitoring
Pr 730
7 - 171
Display logbook
01
7 - 172
Print logbook
02
7 - 173
7 - 198
6.111.98.5.01.18
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
You can generally eliminate the errors specified below yourself, using the described
remedy.
In the case of errors which you cannot eliminate yourself and which are not described in
this Operating Manual, please call your Bizerba customer service point.
Please provide your Bizerba customer service point with the following details:
-
Device type (see type plate)
Device no. (see type plate)
Error description
This will facilitate preparations by customer service staff.
8.1
8
Fault description
Fault
Display does not illumi

nate.
Cause
No supply voltage.
Rectification
Check and insert power cable.
Check connection plug
Check connection cable
Press On-Off key
Weight value display not Load plate not correctly posi

at zero or modified.
tioned or objects located on
the load plate.
Clean load plate, position cor

rectly and remove objects.
Soiling on or beneath the load

plate.
Level scale.
Scale not leveled.
Switch scale off/on.
Printer will not print.
Open print head.
Connect print head correctly

(see page 5 - 10).
Printer jammed.
Drive motor for paper trans

port overloaded or jammed.
Check paper track and re

move any detached labels.
Clean printer (paper guide).
Poor receipt or label

printing.
6.111.98.5.01.18
Unsuitable receipt or label pa Clean thermal strip.

per.
8-1
Troubleshooting
8.2
Messages
Operating errors or faults in the electronics are indicated by Cod and an error code digit.
Display
Cod 1 1 2
kg T
kg
Price / kg
Price
Cause
Messages
8
Rectification
Cod 112
Movement of the scale during

start-up.
Do not move the scale!
Cod 110
Scale loaded during start-up.
Unload scales!
Cod 110
Scale below zero during start- Fit load plate!

up.
Cod 110
Scale below zero after start-

up.
Fit load plate and press <C>

key!
Error 073
Scale sales overflow.
Print and delete sales, see

menus Pr 310, Pr 311 and Pr
320
PAPErEND
End of paper
insert new ticket paper or new

label roll.
incorrect setting
Check setting in Pr 505.

0= Receipt paper
1=Label paper
---
Press <C> key or switch the

scale off and on again with the
<On-Of f> key.
Other error code digits
8-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
Maintenance
Maintenance
9.1
Cleaning
The cleaning instructions must be observed during installation, operation and

maintenance.
9.1.1
Cleaning device
_______________________________________________________________________
DANGER
Water getting into device!

Danger of death from electric shock.
-
Make sure that no water runs into the device when cleaning.
Do not wash device off or spray-wash.
9
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION
Incorrect cleaning agents!

Damage of device surfaces.
-
Do not use spirit, acetone or aggressive cleaning or scouring agents.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Switch off device before cleaning and pull out power plug.
_______________________________________________________________________
Use warm water with dish-washing detergent (food safe) for cleaning. Use a soft,
non-fraying cloth, moistened lightly.
6.111.98.5.01.18
9-1
Maintenance
9.1.2
Cleaning the printer
Clean thermal bar

Ticket printer, label printer or Linerless printer.
The thermal printhead must be cleaned on a regular basis and as soon as you notice that
the printing quality has decreased.
_______________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION
Coated thermal bar!

The thermal bar is coated with a glass passivation layer and must not
be touched or cleaned with hard objects.
Use Bizerba cleaning products to clean the thermal bar.
_______________________________________________________________________
9
Open the side cover of the scale.

Open the printer cover by pulling it
upwards.
Open the printhead.
Clean the thermal bar 1 with the Bizerba
thermal printhead cleaning pen or dip a
cleaning pad in Bizerba cleaning solvent..
Afterwards, dry off with a dry cleaning
bud.
Fig. 106: Thermal bar
9-2
6.111.98.5.01.18
Maintenance
Clean label printer

Inspect label printer weekly for glue residue deposits on deflection pin, take-up arbor and
paper deflector and clean.
Clean the deflection pin and take-up pin.
Open the printer cover and printhead.

Remove the label roll.
Remove glue from parts
9
Fig. 107: Deflection pin, take-up pin
Clean paper deflector
Pull the paper deflector
out sideways.
Clean the paper deflector with the LR

label remover, from Bizerba.
The LR-label remover may not be
used to clean thermal bars.
2
Fig. 108: Paper deflector

Push the paper deflector
6.111.98.5.01.18
in sideways.
9-3
Maintenance
9.1.3
Cleaning products for printer
Ordering information
The cleaning products can be obtained from Bizerba Service or Bizerba technical
consultants.
Cleaner for thermal bar
Cleaning pen 12ml
Order no.: 5077 7050000
or
9
Aerosol can, 200ml
Order no.: 9400 8900133
Thermal bar cleaning set

consisting of:
5 cleaning buds made of wood with leather
coating
1 pcs. IPA cleaning solvent 12 ml
Order no.: 9400 8919 000
Moisten the tip of the cleaning bud with a

few drops of the cleaning solvent.
Clean the thermal bar immediately with
cleaning bud.
9-4
6.111.98.5.01.18
Maintenance
Cleaner for residues of glue from labels

_______________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION
Thermal bar coating and rubber rollers!

Damage to the coating
-
Do not use label remover for cleaning thermal bar and

rubber-covered roll!
_______________________________________________________________________
Label remover
Aerosol can, 200ml
Order no.: 9594 3000000
9
6.111.98.5.01.18
9-5
Maintenance
9.2
Maintenance
The load plate must be removed every 4 weeks and loose dirt removed with a brush or
vacuum cleaner.
Replace the load plate and check the zero point of the scale. Switch the scale off and on if
necessary.
9.2.1
Testing the weight display
Place reference weight of 2x3 kg on the scale and read off the display at 3 and 6kg.
This test must be repeated at regular intervals.
9.2.2
9
Note on storing thermal paper
Store unprinted thermal paper without direct light exposure to light (original packaging) in
closed box or similar, if possible. It keeps its printability for up to 5 years if stored at max.
60 oC and at a max. of 65% relative air humidity.
Printed thermal paper is readable for up to 10 years if not exposed to direct sunlight and if
kept at temperatures up to a maximum of 30 o C and at a maximum of 65% relative air
humidity.
9.2.3
Ticket, label and Linerless rollers
To avoid faults in the device, only ticket and label rolls may be used that have been
checked and approved by Bizerba.These ticket and label rollers are identified with a
corresponding number.
We are not liable for damage/faults that are produced from using ticket and label rolls that
have not been checked and approved by Bizerba.
Therefore, please order ticket, labels and Linerless rolls only at a Bizerba sales agent near
you:
Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG
Papier und Etiketten
Harpener Hellweg 31
44805 Bochum 1
Germany
Phone: +49 234 / 9557-0
FAX: +49 234 / 5070247
9-6
6.111.98.5.01.18
10
Technical data
10.1
Dimensions
Technical data
Scale BC II 800
L
Length:
W Width:
H Overall height:
H1 Complete height:
342 mm
462 mm
90 mm
H1
512 mm
H
W
10
Fig. 109: BC II 800

Scale BC II 100
Length:
360 mm
W Width:
432 mm
H Overall height:
174 mm
W
L
Fig. 110: BC II 100

Scale BC II 200
L
Length:
360 mm
W Width:
487 mm
H Overall height:
174 mm
H1 Complete height:
461 mm
H1
H
W
L
Fig. 111: BC II 200

6.111.98.5.01.18
10 - 1
Technical data
10.2
Power supply
The electrical power supply must comply with the national requirements and tolerances.
Technical data for the mains power supply
Mains supply
Single-phase A.C. voltage, see data on type plate.
Permissible mains voltage tolerance (steady-state) normal:
+6% to -10% of nominal value
Supply frequency:
50/60 Hz
10
Permissible tolerance of mains frequency:

+2% to -2%
Permissible nonlinear distortion factor of supply voltage
x 5%
Protective conductor leakage current max.:
3.5 mA
10.3
Environmental conditions
The following conditions must always be observed when using electronic retail scales,
POS terminals, weighing and EDP systems, recording equipment and similar devices,
equipment combinations and spare parts.
For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective
manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.
Threshold values
Device family
Protection
type in
accordanc
e with
IP
EDP systems:
20
+15
(+60)
+30
(+87)
-10
(+14)
+43
(+109)
Retail scales
20
-10
(+14)
+40
(+104)
-20
(-4)
+60
(+140)
External devices
1
Temperature
Relative humidity%
oC Celsius
(degF Fahrenheit)
Operation
Storage
Operation Storage
min.
max.
min.
max. min. max. min.max. 1
8
80
90
20
80
90
The threshold values of the respective manufacturer apply.
Bedewing of equipment is not permitted
10 - 2
6.111.98.5.01.18
Subject index
A
Addition of customer total, 7 - 88
Amount tend./change operation,
7 - 97
Release printout on ticket, 7 - 116
Article
Assign barcode, 7 - 45
Assign product group, 7 - 44
Assign supplementary text, 7 - 48
Data of origin, 7 - 47
define, 7 - 43
Define article tare, 7 - 44
Define unit price, 7 - 44
delete, 7 - 54
Enter sell-by date, 7 - 45
Overwrite unit price, 7 - 46
Print article label, 7 - 95
Print list, 7 - 53
Report, 7 - 78
Rounding of article total, 7 - 109
Text, 7 - 47
Type, 7 - 46
Weight class, 7 - 47
Article maintenance, 7 - 42
Define PLU, 7 - 43
Assign VAT, to PLU, 7 - 38
Assisted sale with labels, 6 - 30
Assisted sales with ticket, 6 - 25
Automatic zero setting, 7 - 90
B
Back-calculation, 7 - 50
Barcode, 7 - 16
Assign Code 128, 7 - 31
Barcode structure example for Code
128, 7 - 29
Barcode structure example, EAN 13,
7 - 22
Check and adopt code structure, 7 - 64
Code 128, 7 - 26
Code structure for all PLUs, 7 - 66
Define barcode structure, 7 - 61
Define structure, 7 - 61
Delete code structure, 7 - 65
6.111.98.5.01.18
Subject index
EAN 13 structure example, 7 - 24

for article, 7 - 45
for non-PLU, 7 - 68
for PLU, 7 - 45
for total, 7 - 68
Height on label, 7 - 123
Height on ticket, 7 - 112
Instore code, Examples, 7 - 24
Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 20, 7 - 23
Instore code EAN 8, 7 - 25
manage, 7 - 65
Manufacturer code EAN 8, 7 - 19
Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 18
Overview, 7 - 16
Print barcode structure, 7 - 65
Print code structure, 7 - 65
Print code structures, 7 - 7
print on label, 7 - 123
print on ticket, 7 - 112
Basic price, programming, 7 - 44
Beeper, on/off, 7 - 154
BLD
BLD label list, 7 - 7, 7 - 71
BLD logo fields, 7 - 49
Delete BLD labels, 7 - 72
Delete BLD logos, 7 - 72
Label example, 7 - 119
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU,
7 - 144
Number of BLD text fields per PLU,
7 - 144
Select BLD labels, 7 - 122
Supplementary text for BLD text fields,
7 - 48
BLD (Bizerba Label Designer), 7 - 7,
7 - 48
By Count fixed weight, 7 - 50
Create, 7 - 36
Mandatory input of pieces, 6 - 43
Overview, 7 - 36
By-Count
Create, 7 - 34
Database configuration, 7 - 33
Fixed weight mode, 7 - 50
Mandatory input, 7 - 50, 7 - 92
Overview, 7 - 33
11 - 1
11
Subject index
Piece goods, 7 - 33
Customer total
Addition, 7 - 88, 7 - 90
negative, 7 - 91
Rounding, 7 - 109
Cancellation, 6 - 12
Cash register
Cash register drawer, 6 - 45
Cash register function, 7 - 96
Connect cash drawer, 4 - 4
Data field monitoring, 7 - 126
Check digit, print on label, 7 - 127
Data of origin, 7 - 47
automatic traceability no., 7 - 32
Manual input, 7 - 32
Sales report, 7 - 81
Clean label printer, 9 - 3
Date, Representation, 7 - 86
Cleaning, 9 - 1
Date / time, set, 7 - 84, 7 - 85
Cleaning printer, 9 - 2
Decimal places, 7 - 145
Cleaning products, 9 - 4
delete
Header and footer texts, 7 - 59
Supplementary texts, 7 - 59
Change line, 7 - 11
11
clear
RAM, 7 - 159
Tare , 6 - 22
Delete memory, 7 - 159
Clear RAM, 7 - 159
Department number, 7 - 141
Code 128, 7 - 26
Assign Code 128, 7 - 31
Operating procedure for structure
creation, 7 - 28
Structure example, 7 - 27, 7 - 29
Designation label, 2 - 2
Commissioning, 4 - 8, 7 - 137
Memory management, 7 - 142
Number of items (ticket memory),
7 - 145
Number of supplementary texts,
7 - 144
Set DHCP, 7 - 138
Set number of PLUs, 7 - 144
Set TCP-IP, 7 - 137
start, 7 - 147
Conditions for the place of
installation, 4 - 1
Configuration, 7 - 84
Constant, 6 - 14, 7 - 94
Continuous operation, 7 - 39
Multicast IP address, 7 - 149
Multicast port number, 7 - 149
Overview, 7 - 39
Scale type, 7 - 148
UDP port number, 7 - 149
11 - 2
Device types, 2 - 1
Direct keys, 7 - 104
Display, 5 - 2
Control lighting, 7 - 150
Icons, 5 - 2
Display ADC program version, 7 - 167
Display battery voltage, 7 - 169
Display program version, 7 - 168
Display test, 7 - 170
Display the load cell type, 7 - 167
E
EAN 13, 7 - 20
Allocate EAN 13, 7 - 23
Example of structure definition, 7 - 22
Structure example, 7 - 21
EAN 8, 7 - 25
Structure example, 7 - 25
End of label, 5 - 12
End of ticket paper, 5 - 11
6.111.98.5.01.18
Environmental conditions, 10 - 2
Explanation of symbols, 1 - 2
F
Fixed weight
Create, 7 - 35
Overview, 7 - 35
Fixed weight , Database
configuration, 7 - 33
Font
Change on label, 7 - 127
change on ticket, 7 - 115
Font type, change, 7 - 10
Footer text
create, 7 - 56
delete, 7 - 59
Print list, 7 - 58
Foreign currency
Calculation method, 7 - 134
Currency exchange rate, 7 - 135
Currency factor, 7 - 135
Currency symbol, 7 - 134
Decimal places, 7 - 134
Print supplementary text on ticket,
7 - 114
Rounding, 7 - 135
Second currency display, 7 - 133
Select function, 7 - 133
Settings, 7 - 133
Translation rule, 7 - 136
G
General operating mode settings,
7 - 90
Guidelines, 2 - 4
Subject index
Print list, 7 - 58
I
Initial display, 7 - 1
Initial setting, 7 - 4
Input
Special characters, 7 - 12
Text, 7 - 10, 7 - 11
Insert ticket roll , 5 - 11
Install label roll, 5 - 12
Installation, 4 - 1
IP address
Display, 7 - 138, 7 - 140
set, 7 - 138
11
Items operator display, 7 - 96
J
Journal, delete, 7 - 83
Journal function, 7 - 146
K
Key functions, 5 - 4
Keyboard, 5 - 3, 5 - 4
Functions, 5 - 4
Keyboard, 5 - 4
Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3
Keyboard selection, 7 - 158
Keys
Function code table, 7 - 157
Modify function, 7 - 156
Konformittserklrung, 3, 5
H
Header and footer text list, 7 - 5
Header text
create, 7 - 56
delete, 7 - 59
6.111.98.5.01.18
L
Label, 5 - 12
Barcode printout, 7 - 123
Change font, 7 - 127
11 - 3
Subject index
11
Data field monitoring, 7 - 126

Delete configuration, 7 - 132
Label distance, 7 - 122
Label height, 7 - 122
Print article label, 7 - 95
Print speed, 7 - 130
Print total label, 7 - 95
Release printing of:
Alternative text sell-by date, 7 - 124
Barcode, 7 - 123
Check digit, 7 - 127
Foreign currency, 7 - 128
Header text, 7 - 124
Logo, 7 - 124
Machine ID, 7 - 127
Operator No., 7 - 127
Packed-on and sell-by date, 7 - 122
Price range and texts, 7 - 127
Tare, 7 - 123
Saving the configuration, 7 - 131
Select configuration, 7 - 132
Set barcode height, 7 - 123
Set beginning of data field, 7 - 125
Set beginning of text field, 7 - 125
Set feed, 7 - 165
Header and footer text list, 7 - 5,
7 - 58
Logo list, 7 - 8
Menu settings, 7 - 163
PLU (articles), 7 - 5
PLU article list, 7 - 53
PLU direct keys, 7 - 6, 7 - 107
Supplementary text list, 7 - 6, 7 - 58
Weighing system information, 7 - 164
Logbook monitoring, 7 - 171
Logo
BLD, 7 - 49
delete, 7 - 71
Print list, 7 - 71
M
Machine ID
set, 7 - 142
Main operating mode, 7 - 4, 7 - 87
select, 7 - 87
Mains supply, 3 - 2, 4 - 3
Label design, Overview, 7 - 118
Maintenance, 9 - 1, 9 - 6
Label type, 7 - 121
Labeling mode, 7 - 101
Manufacturer code EAN 8, 7 - 19
Labels
Delete BLD labels, 7 - 72
Move print format, 7 - 165
Multi- printing, 6 - 8, 6 - 9
Multiple printing, 7 - 102
Price labeling mode, 6 - 7
Price labeling mode , 6 - 6
Print BLD label list, 7 - 71
Quick-service mode, 6 - 4
Rotated layout, 7 - 128
Self-service mode, 6 - 3
Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 18
Leveling of scale, 4 - 2
Lists
Barcode structures, 7 - 7, 7 - 65
BLD label list, 7 - 7
Communication settings, 7 - 140
Delete header and footer text list,
7 - 59
Delete supplementary text list, 7 - 59
11 - 4
Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3
Memory management, 7 - 142
Menu call-up, 7 - 2
Menu password, 7 - 1, 7 - 159
Minus amount, 6 - 11
Multiple operator mode, 7 - 94
Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2
Multiplication
Minus amount, 6 - 11
PLU price per piece, 6 - 17
Price per piece manual input, 6 - 10
N
Negative customer total, 7 - 91
6.111.98.5.01.18
Network
Display IP address, 7 - 140
Settings, 7 - 137
Non-PLU, Settings, 7 - 67
Numerical codes , 7 - 62
O
Operating conditions, 2 - 5
Operating options
Labels multi-printing/fixed weight, 6 - 9
Multi- printing of labels, 6 - 8
Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2
Overview, 6 - 2
Price labeling mode, 6 - 6, 6 - 7
Operational safety, 3 - 2
Operator
Keys, 7 - 103
Number, 7 - 127
Report, 7 - 80
Operator report, 7 - 80
Operator tare, 6 - 23
call up value saved, 6 - 24
save value entered, 6 - 23
save weighed value, 6 - 23
Origin labeling, 7 - 91
Define data of origin number, 7 - 91
PLU data of origin, 7 - 47
Overview of list, 7 - 5
P
Packed-on date
Alternative text, 7 - 130
Paper , Label printer, 5 - 13
Paper end detection, 7 - 166
Paper feed, Label printer in BC II 800,
Ticket paper, 5 - 11
Paper type, 7 - 88, 7 - 90
Password, 7 - 1, 7 - 159
6.111.98.5.01.18
Subject index
Payment in/out, 6 - 45
Place of installation, 4 - 1
PLU, 5 - 5
-Overwrite unit price, 6 - 17
Assign barcode, 7 - 45
Assign product group, 7 - 44
Assign supplementary text, 7 - 48
call, 6 - 15
define, 7 - 43
Define PLU tare, 7 - 44
delete, 7 - 54
Direct key allocation, 7 - 104
Direct key mode, 7 - 104
Enter number of digits, 7 - 104
Enter sell-by date, 7 - 45
Input mode, 7 - 103
Input with 10-key keypad, 6 - 16
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU,
7 - 144
Number of BLD text fields per PLU,
7 - 144
Number of digits for input, 7 - 104
Number of supplementary texts per
PLU, 7 - 144
PLU text, 7 - 47
Print direct keys, 7 - 107
Print direct keys list, 7 - 6
Print list, 7 - 53
Range limitation, 7 - 105
registration, 6 - 17
Report, 7 - 78
Set number, 7 - 144
Tare , 6 - 22
PLU
Define unit price, 7 - 44
PLU list, 7 - 5
PLU number, for Non-PLU, 7 - 70
Power supply, 10 - 2
Price calculation, 7 - 108
Price labeling mode, 6 - 6, 6 - 7,
7 - 101
Price overwrite, 6 - 17, 7 - 46
Price per piece manual input, 6 - 10
11 - 5
11
Subject index
Print boot log information, 7 - 162
Print communication settings, 7 - 140
Print direct keys list, 7 - 6
Print fonts, 7 - 163
Print logbook, 7 - 173
Print menu settings, 7 - 163
Weighing system information, 7 - 164
Print speed, 7 - 130
Print supplement. text list, 7 - 6
Print weighing system information,
7 - 164
11
Printer, 5 - 8
Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800 ,
5-9
Printer lid BC II 100/200 , 5 - 8
Side cover BC II 100/ 200, 5 - 8
test, 7 - 161
Thermal print head, 5 - 10
Operator, 7 - 80
PLU products, 7 - 78
Product groups, 7 - 79
Sales by data of origin, 7 - 81
Scales, 7 - 77
VAT report, 7 - 82
Reverification, 2 - 3
Rounding, 7 - 108
By count, 7 - 110
Supplementary text, 7 - 114
S
Safety instructions, 3 - 1
Sales
delete, 7 - 83
display, 7 - 83
Sales calculation, 7 - 92
Printer settings, 7 - 165

Change print intensity , 7 - 166
Sales calculation, Release addition,

7 - 92
Printing head, open/close, 5 - 10
Product groups, for PLU, 7 - 44
Scale
Payment in/out, 6 - 45
Sensitivity, 7 - 155
Turn-of f time, 7 - 151
with cash drawer, 6 - 45
Product with data of origin, 6 - 46
Scale number, 7 - 140
Programming overview, 7 - 174
Scale switch-off time, 7 - 151
Product group, for non-PLU, 7 - 69

Product group report, 7 - 79
Q
Quick service mode, 7 - 100
R
RAM, use, 7 - 146
Range limitation, 7 - 105
Receipt, Correct feed, 7 - 166
Rechargeable battery, 4 - 6
Icons, 4 - 7
Reports, 7 - 75
Customer name for reports, 7 - 76
on label, 7 - 82
on ticket, 7 - 77
11 - 6
Scales network, Continuous

operation, 7 - 39
Scales reports, 7 - 77
Scroll function, 6 - 13
Scrolling message
activate, 7 - 93
Define text, 7 - 57
Delete text, 7 - 60
select, 7 - 93
Select display location, 7 - 93
Settings, 7 - 93
test, 7 - 94
Scrolling messages
activating, 7 - 15
Define text, 7 - 15
print, 7 - 6
6.111.98.5.01.18
Second currency, 7 - 160
Change main currency, 7 - 160
Convert PLU price, 7 - 160
Select layout
Label layout, 7 - 87, 7 - 89
Ticket layout, 7 - 87, 7 - 89
Sell-by date, 7 - 45
Alternative text on label, 7 - 124
for non-PLU, 7 - 67
Print on label, 7 - 122
Print texts, 7 - 127
Subject index
Special characters, 7 - 12
Standards, 2 - 4
Subtotal, 6 - 14
Supplementary text
for BLD text fields, 7 - 48
for PLU, 7 - 48
Supplementary texts
create, 7 - 55
delete, 7 - 59
print, 7 - 58
Supply voltage , 3 - 2, 4 - 3
Sensitivity, of the scale, 7 - 155
Switch off, 6 - 1
Service menu, 7 - 161
Switch on, 6 - 1
Set width of paper , 5 - 13
Switching operating mode, 7 - 89

select, 7 - 89
Settings
Date, 7 - 85
Date representation, 7 - 86
Department number, 7 - 141
different operating modes, 7 - 87
Display lighting, 7 - 150
DNS1, DNS2, 7 - 139
Euro, 7 - 160
for different operating modes, 7 - 90
Gateway, 7 - 138
Host name, 7 - 139
IP address, 7 - 138
Machine ID, 7 - 142
Main operating mode, 7 - 87
Multiple operator mode, 7 - 94
Network, 7 - 137
Non-PLU, 7 - 67
Price calculation, 7 - 108
Price labeling mode, 7 - 101
Print menu settings, 7 - 163
Printer, 7 - 165
Quick service mode, 7 - 100
Scale number, 7 - 140
Scrolling message, 7 - 93
Sensitivity, 7 - 155
Subnet mask, 7 - 138
Switching operating mode, 7 - 89
TCP-IP , 7 - 137
Time, 7 - 85
Year with 2, 4 digits, 7 - 85
Side cover , 5 - 8
6.111.98.5.01.18
Switching operation mode, 7 - 4

System
Continuous operation, 7 - 39
Identification on system, 7 - 40
Installation, 4 - 5
Multicast IP address, 7 - 149
Multicast port number, 7 - 149
Scale type, 7 - 148
System conditions, 7 - 40
System set-up, 7 - 40
Take device out of the system, 7 - 41
UDP port number, 7 - 149
T
Talon, 6 - 26, 7 - 97
Tare
Fixed value memory, 7 - 108
PLU tare, 7 - 44
Tare %, 7 - 52
Tare
Batch tare, 6 - 20
clear, 6 - 22
Manual tare, 6 - 21
Operator tare, 6 - 23, 6 - 24
unknown tare, 6 - 19
Tare functions, 6 - 19
PLU tare, 6 - 22
11 - 7
11
Subject index
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4, 6 - 22
Test printing, 7 - 161
Text
Alternative text for packed-on date,
7 - 130
Alternative text for use-by date,
7 - 130
Article supplement. text, 7 - 48
Create header and footer text, 7 - 56
delete, 7 - 59
Function keys, 7 - 14
Input, 7 - 10
Input PLU text, 7 - 47
print
Header and footer text, 7 - 5, 7 - 58
Supplementary texts, 7 - 6
Print out overview, 7 - 58
Scrolling message, 7 - 57
Supplementary text, 7 - 55
11
Thermal bar, Cleaning, 9 - 2

Thermal paper storage, 9 - 6
Thermal strip, close, 5 - 10
Ticket
Assisted sales, 6 - 25
Change font, 7 - 115
Number of article text lines, 7 - 115
Open ticket again, 6 - 27, 6 - 28,
7 - 98
open tickets, 7 - 91
print upon request, 6 - 26
Printing foreign currency, 7 - 116
Printout cancellation, 7 - 99
Printout of VAT incl., 7 - 99
Printout, as required, 7 - 99
Release printing of:
Amount paid in/out, 7 - 116
Barcode, 7 - 112
footer text, 7 - 113
Foreign currency supplementary text,
7 - 114
Header text, 7 - 113
Rounding suppl. text, 7 - 114
Supplementary article text, 7 - 116
Tare, 7 - 113
Repeat ticket, 6 - 27, 7 - 98
Set barcode height, 7 - 112
Ticket counter, 7 - 115
11 - 8
Ticket design, Overview, 7 - 111
Ticket journal, Call-up data volume,
7 - 136
Time, set, 7 - 85
Total, 6 - 14
Rounding of article total, 7 - 109
Rounding of customer total, 7 - 109
Total label, 7 - 88
Total sales report, 7 - 82
delete, 7 - 83
display, 7 - 83
Traceability data, 6 - 46
Traceability marker, 7 - 32
U
Unit price input, 6 - 10
via 10-key keypad, 6 - 10
Use-by date, Alternative text, 7 - 130
V
VAT
administer, 7 - 72
Allocate to PLU, 7 - 51
Define VAT rate, 7 - 73
For all articles, 7 - 74
for non-PLU minus, 7 - 70
for non-PLU non-weighed, 7 - 70
for non-PLU weighed, 7 - 70
inclusive or exclusive, 7 - 73
List, 7 - 9
manage, 7 - 74
Overview, 7 - 37
overwriteable, 7 - 51
Print list, 7 - 74
Text , 7 - 73
Verbund, Installation, 4 - 5
Verification information, 2 - 3
W
Waagenverbund, Installation, 4 - 5
6.111.98.5.01.18
Weight input, Manual, 6 - 18
WLAN
Functional diagnosis, 7 - 154
on/off, 7 - 151
Settings, 7 - 152, 7 - 153
Switch on, 7 - 152
Subject index
Z
Zero setting, 7 - 90
Zerosetting, 6 - 1
Y
Year , 2 or 4-digit, 7 - 85
11
6.111.98.5.01.18
11 - 9
Appendix
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
Appendix
Appendix
6.111.98.5.01.18
Hauptverwaltung Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen
Wilhelm-Kraut-Strae 65
72336 Balingen, Germany
Declaration of type conformity

We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described
below
Definition:
retail scale
Type:
BC II . . . (100, 200, 800)
No. of EC type approval certificate:
D07-09-014
No. of notified body for EC type approval

certificate:
0102 (PTB)
complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current
requirements of the following EC directives:
Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments
2009/23/EC
EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility
2004/108/EC
Directive on electrical equipment designed for use

within certain voltage limits
2006/95/EC
Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology:
DIN EN 45501: 1992 (OIML R76-1, 2006)
EMC:
DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 55022/2011-12

DIN EN 61000-3-2/2010-03; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06
Safety:
DIN EN 60950-1
This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic

weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type
conformity of a notified body.
This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba.
The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba
order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the
prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.
Date:
September 27th, 2012
Signature of manufacturer:
ppa.
Title:
Andreas W. Kraut
Chairman of the Executive Board
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) & Shareholder
6.111.98.5.01.18
Hauptverwaltung Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen
Wilhelm-Kraut-Strae 65
72336 Balingen, Germany
Declaration of type conformity

We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described
below
Definition:
retail scale
Type:
BC II . . . (100, 200, 800)

with WLAN
No. of EC type approval certificate:
D07-09-014
No. of notified body for EC type approval

certificate:
0102 (PTB)
complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current
requirements of the following EC directives:
Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments
2009/23/EC
EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility
2004/108/EC
Directive on electrical equipment designed for use

within certain voltage limits
2006/95/EC
Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology:
DIN EN 45501: 1992 (OIML R76-1, 2006)
EMC:
DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 55022/2011-12

DIN EN 61000-3-2/2010-03; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06
Safety:
DIN EN 60950-1
WLAN:
See data in declaration of conformity of manufacturer.
This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic

weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type
conformity of a notified body.
This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba.
The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba
order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the
prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.
Date:
September 27th, 2012
Signature of manufacturer:
ppa.
Title:
Andreas W. Kraut
Chairman of the Executive Board
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) & Shareholder
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18

Manual Cantar Bizerba BC II 100 e 36kg Fara Acumulator 30 Taste Tactile Directe 12538

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Manual Cantar Bizerba BC II 100 e 36kg Fara Acumulator 30 Taste Tactile Directe 12538

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Retail scale BC II

Alle Rechte vorbehalten

Translation of original operating instructions

Device and operating controls

About these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -

Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

Disposal of devices/environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -

Requirements on the operating personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

Sources of risk related to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -

Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

Installation and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Switch on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -

Device and operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -

Switch off device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 -

Unit price input via 10-key keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10

Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . .

Assisted sales with ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25

Print ticket upon request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26

Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Serviced selling with label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30

By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40

Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45

Product with data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46

Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

Initial scale setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -

General procedure for text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10

Overview of scrolling messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15

Overview of By Count article definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33

Create overview of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35

Overview of By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36

Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) . . . 7 - 39

Article maintenance menu Pr 1-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data management Menu Pr 2-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 .

Reports menu Pr 3-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuration menu Pr 5-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535 .

Ticket design overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Label design - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning menu Pr 6-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keyboard selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr631 .

Service menu Pr 7-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 174

Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Threshold values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 -

About these instructions

About these instructions

About these instructions

Various symbols are used in these instructions.

Position numbers in figures.

Text within < > describes a key.

Text within indicates the display text.

Price overwrite permitted

About these instructions

Warnings are divided into danger levels by the signal word.

Source of danger with high risk with imminent danger for

Source of danger with medium risk with potentially threatening

Source of danger with low risk with potentially threatening

Source of danger, improper use!

About these instructions

About the device

About the device